JP2015157484A - tape cassette - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a tape cassette capable of making a tape printing device accurately detect a type of a tape.SOLUTION: A tape cassette 30 includes: a box-shaped cassette case 31; a tape 50 stored in the cassette case 31; an arm part 34 for guiding the tape 50 to a discharge aperture 341; a head insertion part 39 passing through the cassette case 31 in a vertical direction; a lower depression recessed in a direction along an arm front wall 35 of a head side wall; and an arm indicator part 800 for indicating a type of the tape. The arm indicator part 800 includes a plurality of indicator parts disposed in a pattern according to the type of the tape. Each of the plurality of indicator parts is one of a switch hole and a surface part.

Description

  The present invention relates to a tape cassette that can be attached to and detached from a tape printer.

  Conventionally, a tape cassette in which a tape is stored in a cassette case is attached to and detached from a cassette mounting portion of the tape printer. There is known a tape cassette that allows a tape printer to detect the type of tape stored in a cassette case when it is mounted on a cassette mounting portion (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

  Specifically, a cassette detection unit in which switch holes are formed in a pattern corresponding to the type of tape is provided on a part of the lower surface of the tape cassette. The cassette mounting portion is provided with a plurality of detection switches protruding upward. When the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting section, the cassette detection section selectively presses the plurality of detection switches according to the switch hole pattern. The tape printer detects the type of tape according to a combination of pressing or non-pressing in a plurality of detection switches.

JP-A-4-133756 Japanese Patent No. 3543659

  For example, when the user does not correctly mount the tape cassette or when the user does not operate the tape printer correctly, the tape cassette may be mounted on the cassette mounting portion in an inclined state from an appropriate posture. When the tape cassette is tilted in the cassette mounting portion, the cassette detection portion may not accurately face a plurality of detection switches. In this case, the cassette detection unit may not press the detection switch that is scheduled to be pressed, or may press the detection switch that is not scheduled to be pressed.

  When a plurality of detection switches are pressed in an incorrect pattern, the tape printer detects a tape type different from the tape type stored in the tape cassette mounted in the cassette mounting portion. As described above, when the wrong type of tape is detected by the tape printer, there is a possibility that malfunction of the tape printer or defective printing may occur.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a tape cassette that allows a tape printer to accurately detect the type of tape.

A tape cassette according to an aspect of the present invention includes an upper case having an upper surface, a bottom surface, a front surface, and a pair of side surfaces, and having an upper plate forming the upper surface, and a lower case having a bottom plate forming the bottom surface. A cassette case , a tape that is a printing medium stored in the cassette case , an arm front wall that is a part of the front surface, and an arm back wall that is a wall portion spaced rearward from the arm front wall A discharge port provided at a downstream end of the tape transport direction, which is a direction in which the tape is transported, and the tape is discharged along the path extending substantially parallel to the arm front wall. An arm portion that is guided toward the head, a head peripheral wall that is rearward of the arm portion and extends substantially parallel to the arm back wall, and a head side wall that connects the arm back wall and the head peripheral wall, Previous And opening through the cassette case in the vertical direction, and the lower recess recessed in a direction along the head side wall than the arm front wall, provided in the arm front wall, and a front indicator portion indicating the type of the tape a tape cassette provided with said lower recess, said is recessed upward from the part of the bottom surface, the front indicator part has a plurality of indicators arranged in a pattern corresponding to the type of pre-Symbol tape Each of the plurality of indicator portions with respect to a plurality of detection switches that are capable of moving forward and backward in a predetermined direction provided in the tape printer when the tape cassette is attached to a cassette attachment portion of the tape printer. And a non-pressing portion that is a hole portion that does not press the detection switch and a pressing portion that is a surface portion that presses the detection switch. The tape cassette which concerns on this aspect can make a tape printer detect the kind of tape correctly.

The tape cassette includes an ink ribbon and a ribbon take-up spool for taking up the ink ribbon, and the lower concave portion is perpendicular to the front surface and passes through the rotation center of the ribbon take-up spool. It may extend to the upstream side in the transport direction.

An upper recess that is recessed from the head side wall in a direction along the arm front wall may be provided, and the upper recess may be recessed downward from a part of the upper surface.

The lower concave portion and the upper concave portion may be at least partially opposed in the vertical direction.

It is a perspective view of the tape printer 1 in the state where the cassette cover 6 is closed. It is a perspective view of the tape printer 1 in the state where the cassette cover 6 is opened. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the tape cassette 30 and the cassette mounting part 8. FIG. 4 is a plan view of a cassette mounting portion 8. FIG. It is a top view of the cassette mounting part 8 in which the laminate type tape cassette 30 was mounted when the platen holder 12 was in the standby position. It is a top view of the cassette mounting part 8 in which the laminate type tape cassette 30 was mounted when the platen holder 12 was in the printing position. It is a top view of the cassette mounting part 8 in which the receptor type tape cassette 30 was mounted | worn when the platen holder 12 exists in a printing position. It is a top view of the cassette mounting part 8 in which the thermal type tape cassette 30 was mounted when the platen holder 12 was in the printing position. 3 is a front view of a head holder 74. FIG. 4 is a left side view of the head holder 74. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the platen holder 12. FIG. It is arrow direction sectional drawing in the III-III line of FIG. It is arrow direction sectional drawing in the II line | wire of FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the tape printer 1. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the tape cassette 30. FIG. 3 is a bottom view of the tape cassette 30. FIG. 3 is a perspective view from above of the tape cassette 30. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the cassette case 31 in a state where parts are developed on an upper case 311 and a lower case 312. FIG. 10 is another perspective view of the cassette case 31 in a state where the parts are developed on the upper case 311 and the lower case 312. 4 is a plan view of a lower case 312. FIG. It is a perspective view of the 1st cylindrical member 881B. 4 is a bottom view of an upper case 311. FIG. It is a perspective view of the 1st press fit pin 881A. 5 is a side cross-sectional view of a first crimping part 881. FIG. 4 is a front view of the tape cassette 30 in which the vicinity of an arm front wall 35 is enlarged. FIG. FIG. 10 is another front view of the tape cassette 30 in which the vicinity of the arm front wall 35 is enlarged. 4 is a side sectional view of a separation wall 33 of a lower case 312 and a corresponding upper case 311 portion. FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a separation unit 61 in a state where parts are developed on an upper case 311 and a lower case 312. It is a perspective view of the tape cassette 30 in a state where the upper case 311 is removed. It is arrow sectional drawing in the IV-IV line of FIG. It is arrow direction sectional drawing in the VV line | wire of FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view in which the tape cassette 30 is expanded. It is arrow direction sectional drawing in the VI-VI line of FIG. It is a perspective view of the rotation member 571, the clutch spring 572, and the lower tape support part 66B. It is arrow direction sectional drawing in the VII-VII line of FIG. It is a right view of the tape cassette 30 which shows the guide hole 47 in a partial cross section. FIG. 4 is a front view of the tape cassette 30 and is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between various components provided on the arm front wall 35. FIG. It is explanatory drawing of specific area | region R0 contained in the arm front wall 35. FIG. 4 is a front view of the tape cassette 30 in which the vicinity of an arm front wall 35 is enlarged. FIG. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the information table 510 for printing. FIG. 4 is a bottom view of the tape cassette 30 in which the vicinity of a rear recess 360 is enlarged. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the tape cassette 30 in which the vicinity of a rear recess 360 is enlarged in a state where an upper case 311 is removed. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the tape cassette 30 in which the vicinity of a rear recess 360 is enlarged in a state where an upper case 311 is removed in a comparative example. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the color information table 520. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the cassette mounting part 8 in the middle of mounting | wearing with the tape cassette 30 from the right side. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the cassette mounting part 8 after the tape cassette 30 was mounted | worn from the right side. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the tape cassette 30 supported with the head holder 74 from the front side. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the tape cassette 30 supported with the head holder 74 from the left side surface side. It is arrow direction sectional drawing in the II-II line | wire of FIG. FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrows along line VIII-VIII in FIG. 39, showing a state where the platen holder 12 shown in FIG. 12 is opposed to the tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of the arrows along the line IX-IX in FIG. 42 showing a state in which the rear support portion 813 shown in FIG. 13 is opposed to the tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing processing related to printing by the tape printer 1. It is a top view of the cassette mounting part 8 in which the laminate type tape cassette 30 was mounted when the platen holder 12 was in the printing position in a modification. FIG. 10 is another plan view of the cassette mounting portion 8 to which the laminate type tape cassette 30 is mounted when the platen holder 12 is in the printing position in a modified example.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The drawings to be referred to are used for explaining technical features that can be adopted by the present invention, and are merely illustrative examples.

  The tape printer 1 and the tape cassette 30 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of this embodiment, the lower left side, upper right side, lower right side, and upper left side of FIGS. 1 and 2 are the front side, the rear side, the right side, and the left side of the tape printer 1, respectively. The lower right side, upper left side, upper right side, and lower left side in FIG. 3 are the front side, rear side, right side, and left side of the tape cassette 30, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, various tapes (for example, thermal paper tape 55, printing tape 57, double-sided adhesive tape 58, and film tape 59) stored in the tape cassette 30 are collectively referred to as a tape. The types of tapes stored in the tape cassette 30 (for example, tape width, printing mode, tape color, character color, etc.) are collectively referred to as tape types.

  First, the tape printer 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. For convenience of explanation, in FIGS. 3 to 8, the side walls that form the periphery of the cassette mounting portion 8 are shown. However, these drawings are only schematic views, and the side walls shown in the drawings are drawn thicker than actual. It is. The gear group including the gears 91, 93, 94, 97, 98 and 101 shown in FIG. 3 is actually covered by the bottom surface of the cavity 811. In order to explain these gear groups, the bottom surface of the cavity 811 is not shown in FIG. 5 to 8, the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 is in a state where the upper case 311 is removed.

  A schematic configuration of the tape printer 1 will be described. The tape printer 1 is a general-purpose tape printer that can use various types of tape cassettes such as a thermal type, a receptor type, and a laminate type. Thermal type tape cassettes are equipped with thermal paper tape. The receptor type tape cassette includes a printing tape and an ink ribbon. The laminate type tape cassette includes a double-sided adhesive tape, a film tape, and an ink ribbon.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the tape printer 1 includes a main body cover 2 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. A keyboard 3 including character keys and function keys is disposed on the front side of the upper surface of the main body cover 2. On the rear side of the keyboard 3, a display 5 capable of displaying characters and the like input with the keyboard 3 is provided. A cassette cover 6 that is opened and closed when the tape cassette 30 (see FIG. 3) is replaced is provided on the rear side of the display 5.

  The cassette cover 6 is a lid portion having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The cassette cover 6 is pivotally supported at both left and right ends above the back surface of the main body cover 2, and is rotatable between a closed position shown in FIG. 1 and an open position shown in FIG. Inside the main body cover 2, a cassette mounting portion 8, which is an area where the tape cassette 30 can be attached and detached, is provided. The cassette mounting portion 8 is covered when the cassette cover 6 is in the closed position (see FIG. 1) and exposed when the cassette cover 6 is in the open position (see FIG. 2).

  On the lower surface of the cassette cover 6, a locking lock 413, a head pressing member 7, and peripheral edge pressing members 911 to 914 are provided. The locking lock 413 is a hook-like body protruding downward. A lock hole 412 corresponding to the locking lock 413 is provided on the front side of the cassette mounting portion 8 of the main body cover 2. When the cassette cover 6 is closed, the locking lock 413 is fitted into the lock hole 412 and the natural opening of the cassette cover 6 is prevented (see FIG. 1).

  The head pressing member 7 and the peripheral pressing members 911 to 914 are prismatic bodies that protrude downward. When the cassette cover 6 is closed, the head pressing member 7 presses the press receiving portion 393 (see FIG. 15) of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 from above. The peripheral pressing members 911 to 914 press the peripheral edge of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 from above when the cassette cover 6 is closed.

  A discharge slit 111 is provided behind the left side surface of the main body cover 2. The discharge slit 111 discharges the printed tape from the cassette mounting portion 8. A discharge window 112 is provided on the left side surface of the cassette cover 6. The discharge window 112 exposes the discharge slit 111 to the outside when the cassette cover 6 is closed.

  The internal structure of the main body cover 2 below the cassette cover 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the cassette mounting portion 8 includes a cavity 811 and a corner support portion 812. The cavity 811 is a recess having a planar bottom surface that is recessed so as to substantially correspond to the shape of the bottom surface 302 of the cassette case 31. The corner support portion 812 is a plane portion that extends horizontally from the outer edge of the cavity 811. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the corner support portion 812 supports the lower surface of the peripheral edge of the tape cassette 30.

  Two positioning pins 102 and 103 are provided at two positions of the corner support portion 812. Specifically, a positioning pin 102 is provided on the left side of the cavity 811. A positioning pin 103 is provided on the right side of the cavity 811. The positioning pins 102 and 103 are respectively inserted into the pin holes 62 and 63 (see FIG. 16) of the cassette case 31 when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8. At this time, the positioning pins 102 and 103 position the tape cassette 30 in the front-rear and left-right directions at the left and right positions of the peripheral portion of the tape cassette 30.

  A head holder 74 is provided in front of the cassette mounting portion 8. The head holder 74 carries the thermal head 10 provided with a heating element (not shown). A tape drive motor 23, which is a stepping motor, is disposed outside the cassette mounting portion 8 (upper right side in FIG. 3). A gear 91 is fixed to the lower end of the drive shaft of the tape drive motor 23. The gear 91 meshes with the gear 93 through the opening. The gear 93 meshes with the gear 94. The gear 94 meshes with the gear 97. The gear 97 is engaged with the gear 98. The gear 98 is engaged with the gear 101.

  A ribbon take-up shaft 95 is erected on the upper surface of the gear 94. The ribbon take-up shaft 95 is a shaft body that can be attached to and detached from the ribbon take-up spool 44. A plurality of cam members 95A are provided radially from the base side to the front end side of the ribbon take-up shaft 95 (see FIG. 45). A tape drive shaft 100 is erected on the upper surface of the gear 101. The tape drive shaft 100 is a shaft body that can be attached to and detached from the tape drive roller 46. A plurality of cam members 100A are provided radially from the base side to the front end side of the tape drive shaft 100 (see FIG. 45).

  When the tape drive motor 23 rotates and rotates the gear 91 counterclockwise with the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the ribbon take-up shaft 95 rotates counterclockwise via the gear 93 and gear 94. Rotate in the direction. The ribbon take-up shaft 95 rotates the ribbon take-up spool 44 mounted on the ribbon take-up shaft 95. Further, the rotation of the gear 94 is transmitted to the tape drive shaft 100 via the gear 97, the gear 98, and the gear 101, and the tape drive shaft 100 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction. The tape drive shaft 100 rotationally drives the tape drive roller 46 attached to the tape drive shaft 100.

  An auxiliary shaft 110 is erected on the rear side of the gear 98. The auxiliary shaft 110 is a substantially cylindrical shaft body that can be inserted into and removed from the first tape support hole 65. A guide shaft 120 is erected on the right rear portion of the cassette mounting portion 8. The guide shaft 120 is a shaft body that can be inserted into and removed from the guide hole 47 (see FIG. 5).

  The guide shaft 120 includes two shaft portions having different diameters (a large diameter shaft portion 120A and a small diameter shaft portion 120B) and a tapered portion 120C (see FIG. 45). The large-diameter shaft portion 120 </ b> A is a shaft portion that forms the base side of the guide shaft 120, and the guide shaft 120 has the largest diameter. The small-diameter shaft portion 120B is a shaft portion that forms the distal end side of the guide shaft 120, and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter shaft portion 120A. The tapered portion 120C is a shaft portion provided between the large diameter shaft portion 120A and the small diameter shaft portion 120B. The tapered portion 120C has a tapered surface whose shaft diameter gradually decreases from the large diameter shaft portion 120A side toward the small diameter shaft portion 120B side.

  The rear edge of the cavity 811 has a shape in which two arcs are arranged side by side in a plan view. A part of the corner support portion 812 located between these two arcs is a rear support portion 813. The rear support portion 813 supports the rear concave portion 360 (see FIG. 16) when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8.

  The rear support unit 813 is provided with a rear detection unit 300 including a plurality of detection switches 310. A switch terminal 317 (see FIG. 13) of the detection switch 310 protrudes upward from the rear support portion 813. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the switch terminal 317 faces the bottom surface 302 side (specifically, the rear step wall 360A shown in FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the detection switch 310 provided in the rear detection unit 300 is referred to as a rear detection switch 310. The rear detection unit 300 of the present embodiment includes five rear detection switches 310A to 310E.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, a cassette hook 75 is erected on the rear side of the head holder 74. The cassette hook 75 includes a protruding portion 751 and a claw portion 752 (see FIG. 49). The protruding portion 751 is a plate-like body that protrudes upward from the bottom surface (not shown) of the cavity 811 substantially vertically. The claw portion 752 is a projecting portion having a substantially triangular shape in sectional view, which projects rearward (leftward in FIG. 49) from the upper end portion of the projecting portion 751. The protrusion 751 has flexibility in the front-rear direction (up and down direction in FIG. 4). The claw portion 752 is locked to the locking portion 397 (see FIG. 49) when the tape cassette 30 is mounted to the cassette mounting portion 8.

  On the front side of the head holder 74, an arm-shaped platen holder 12 is provided. The platen holder 12 is pivotally supported around a pivotal support 121 so that it can swing. A platen roller 15 and a movable conveyance roller 14 are rotatably supported at the front end side of the platen holder 12. The platen roller 15 can contact and separate from the thermal head 10 relative to the thermal head 10. The movable conveying roller 14 can be brought into contact with and separated from the tape driving roller 46 relative to the tape driving roller 46 mounted on the tape driving shaft 100.

  The platen holder 12 is connected to a release lever (not shown) that moves in the left-right direction in conjunction with opening and closing of the cassette cover 6. When the cassette cover 6 is opened, the release lever moves to the right, and the platen holder 12 moves toward the standby position shown in FIG. In the standby position shown in FIG. 5, since the platen holder 12 is separated from the cassette mounting portion 8, a person can attach and detach the tape cassette 30 to and from the cassette mounting portion 8. The platen holder 12 is always elastically biased to the standby position by a winding spring (not shown).

  When the cassette cover 6 is closed, the release lever moves to the left, and the platen holder 12 moves toward the printing position shown in FIGS. At the printing position shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the platen holder 12 is close to the cassette mounting portion 8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, when the laminate type tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the platen roller 15 presses the thermal head 10 via the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60. To do. At the same time, the movable conveyance roller 14 presses the tape driving roller 46 via the double-sided adhesive tape 58 and the film tape 59.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the receptor type tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the platen roller 15 presses the thermal head 10 via the print tape 57 and the ink ribbon 60. At the same time, the movable conveyance roller 14 presses the tape driving roller 46 via the printing tape 57. As shown in FIG. 8, when the thermal type tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the platen roller 15 presses the thermal head 10 via the thermal paper tape 55. At the same time, the movable conveying roller 14 presses the tape driving roller 46 via the thermal paper tape 55.

  6 to 8, the tape printer 1 can perform printing using the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8. Details of the thermal paper tape 55, the printing tape 57, the double-sided adhesive tape 58, the film tape 59, and the ink ribbon 60 will be described later.

  A cut mechanism 17 for cutting the printed tape 50 at a predetermined position is provided on the right side of the discharge slit 111 (see FIG. 2). The cutting mechanism 17 has a fixed blade 18 and a moving blade 19. The movable blade 19 is movable in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 4 to 8) facing the fixed blade 18.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 8, an arm detection unit 200 including a plurality of detection switches 210 is provided on the rear side surface of the platen holder 12 slightly on the right side from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. Hereinafter, the rear side surface of the platen holder 12, that is, the surface facing the thermal head 10 is referred to as a cassette facing surface 122. The switch terminal 222 (see FIG. 12) of the detection switch 210 protrudes substantially horizontally from the cassette facing surface 122 toward the cassette mounting portion 8.

  In other words, the switch terminal 222 protrudes in a direction substantially orthogonal to the attaching / detaching direction of the tape cassette 30 with respect to the cassette mounting portion 8 (vertical direction in FIG. 3). When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the switch terminal 222 faces the front surface of the tape cassette 30 (specifically, the arm front wall 35). Hereinafter, the detection switch 210 provided in the arm detection unit 200 is referred to as an arm detection switch 210. The arm detection unit 200 of the present embodiment includes five arm detection switches 210A to 210E.

  Details of the head holder 74 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the head holder 74 is formed of a single plate-like member, and includes a pedestal portion 743 and a head fixing portion 744. The pedestal portion 743 is fixed below the bottom surface (not shown) of the cavity 811. The head fixing portion 744 is bent substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 743 and extends upward, and is disposed along the left-right direction.

  When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the head holder 74 is inserted into the head insertion portion 39. However, the right end portion of the head holder 74 extends to the right side of the right end portion of the head insertion portion 39 in a state where the head holder 74 is inserted into the head insertion portion 39. The thermal head 10 is fixed to the front surface of the head fixing portion 744 (see FIGS. 5 to 8).

  The head fixing portion 744 is provided with a first support portion 741 and a second support portion 742. The first support portion 741 and the second support portion 742 support the tape cassette 30 mounted on the tape printer 1 from below. The first support portion 741 is a step portion formed at a predetermined height position by cutting out the right end portion of the head fixing portion 744 into an L shape in front view. The second support portion 742 is an extending piece having a rectangular shape in side view extending from the left end portion of the head fixing portion 744 substantially perpendicular to the head fixing portion 744 and extending rearward. The first support part 741 and the second support part 742 are provided at the same vertical position (height position).

  That is, the first support part 741 and the second support part 742 extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to each other in plan view. The first support part 741 and the second support part 742 respectively support the tape cassette 30 at the same height position on the upstream side and the downstream side in the tape transport direction with respect to the thermal head 10. The first support portion 741 and the second support portion 742 are set at positions that are separated from the center position of the thermal head 10 in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the first support portion 741 and the second support portion 742 serve as a reference for positioning the tape cassette 30 in the vertical direction with respect to the vertical center position of the thermal head 10.

  Details of the arm detection switch 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. As shown in FIG. 11, five through holes 123 are arranged in three rows in the vertical direction on the cassette facing surface 122 of the platen holder 12. Specifically, two are arranged in the top row, two in the middle row, and one in the bottom row. The positions of the through holes 123 in the left-right direction are different from each other.

  That is, in order from the right side of the cassette facing surface 122 (left side in FIG. 11), the five through holes 123 are arranged in the order of the bottom row, the right side of the top row, the right side of the middle row, the left side of the top row, and the left side of the middle row. Are arranged in a zigzag. Corresponding to these through holes 123, five arm detection switches 210A, 210B, 210C, 210D, and 210E are provided in order from the left side of the cassette facing surface 122 (the right side of FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 12, the arm detection switch 210 includes a main body 221 and a switch terminal 222. The main body 221 is a cylindrical body that is horizontally installed inside the platen holder 12. A front end portion (right end portion in FIG. 12) of the main body portion 221 is fixed to a switch support plate 220 installed inside the platen holder 12.

  The switch terminal 222 is a rod-like body provided at the rear end portion (left end portion in FIG. 12) of the main body portion 221, and can advance and retract substantially horizontally through the through hole 123. The switch terminal 222 is always held in a state of extending from the main body 221 to the rear side (left side in FIG. 12) by a spring member (not shown) provided inside the main body 221. When the switch terminal 222 is not pressed from the rear, the switch terminal 222 is extended from the main body 221 (off state). When the switch terminal 222 is pressed from the rear, the switch terminal 222 is pressed into the main body 221 (on state). Become.

  When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, when the platen holder 12 moves toward the standby position (see FIG. 5), the arm detection switches 210 are separated from the tape cassette 30 and are therefore all turned off. . When the platen holder 12 moves toward the printing position (see FIGS. 6 to 8), the arm detection switch 210 is selectively pressed by an arm index portion 800 (see FIG. 3) described later. The tape printer 1 detects the tape type of the tape cassette 30 based on the on / off combination of the arm detection switch 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the cassette facing surface 122 of the platen holder 12 is provided with a locking piece 225 that is a protrusion extending in the left-right direction. Specifically, the locking piece 225 is integrally formed with the platen holder 12 so as to protrude rearward (left side in FIG. 12) from the cassette facing surface 122. That is, like the switch terminal 222, the locking piece 225 protrudes substantially horizontally from the cassette facing surface 122 toward the cassette mounting portion 8. The protruding height of the locking piece 225 with respect to the cassette facing surface 122 is slightly larger than the protruding height of the switch terminal 222 with respect to the cassette facing surface 122.

  The locking piece 225 has an inclined portion 226 in which a part of the lower surface is inclined with respect to the horizontal direction so that the thickness gradually decreases toward the distal end side (left side in FIG. 12). The locking piece 225 is provided at a height position facing the locking hole 820 (see FIG. 3) in a state where the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8. In the present embodiment, the locking piece 225 is disposed on the cassette facing surface 122 at a position above the uppermost arm detection switch 210 in the vertical direction and overlapping the lowermost arm detection switch 210 in the left-right direction. .

  Details of the rear detection switch 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 13. As shown in FIG. 4, the rear support portion 813 is provided with five through holes 814 arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the arrangement is four in the rear row and one in the front row. Corresponding to these through holes 814, the four rear detection switches 310A to 310D are arranged in a line along the rear end portion of the rear support portion 813 in order from the right side (left side in FIG. 13), and second from the left. The remaining rear detection switch 310E is arranged in front of the rear detection switch 310C.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the rear detection switch 310 includes a main body 316 and a switch terminal 317. The main body 316 is a cylindrical body installed vertically below the rear support 813. The lower end of the main body 316 is fixed to a switch support plate 315 installed inside the main body cover 2.

  The switch terminal 317 is a rod-like body provided at the upper end portion of the main body 316 and can be advanced and retracted in the vertical direction via the through hole 814. The switch terminal 317 is always held in a state of extending upward from the main body 316 by a spring member (not shown) provided inside the main body 316. When the switch terminal 317 is not pressed from above, the switch terminal 317 extends from the main body 316 (off state), and when pressed from above, the switch terminal 317 is pressed into the main body 316 (on state). Become.

  When the tape cassette 30 is not mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the rear detection switch 310 is separated from the tape cassette 30, and therefore all are turned off. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the rear detection switch 310 is selectively pressed by a rear index portion 900 (see FIG. 16) described later. The tape printer 1 detects the tape type of the tape cassette 30 based on the combination of turning on and off the rear detection switch 310.

  With reference to FIG. 4, the positional relationship of each member erected on the cassette mounting portion 8 will be described. A two-dot chain line in FIG. 4 indicates a dividing line J that is an imaginary line connecting the tape drive shaft 100 and the guide shaft 120 in plan view. The tape drive shaft 100, the guide shaft 120, the auxiliary shaft 110, the ribbon take-up shaft 95, and the head holder 74 are in a state where the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the roller support hole 64, the guide hole 47, the first They are provided at positions corresponding to the tape support hole 65, the take-up spool support hole 68, and the head insertion portion 39 (see FIG. 45).

  The tape drive shaft 100 is erected in a region P <b> 1 including a corner portion located on the left front side in the cassette mounting portion 8. The region P <b> 1 is located on the left side of the head holder 74 fixed at the front center of the cassette mounting portion 8. In other words, the region P1 is located downstream of the print position of the thermal head 10 in the tape transport direction. The guide shaft 120 is erected in a region P <b> 2 including a corner portion located on the right rear side in the cassette mounting portion 8. That is, when the cassette mounting portion 8 is viewed in plan, the corner included in the region P2 is located at the opposite corner of the corner included in the region P1.

  In plan view, when the cassette mounting portion 8 is divided by the dividing line J, the region P3 occupies the rear side of the dividing line J, and the region P4 occupies the front side of the dividing line J. The auxiliary shaft 110 is erected in the region P <b> 3, and more specifically, is located on the left rear side with respect to the center of the cassette mounting portion 8 in plan view. The ribbon take-up shaft 95 is erected in the region P4, and more specifically, is located on the right front side of the center of the cassette mounting portion 8 in plan view. That is, the auxiliary shaft 110 and the ribbon take-up shaft 95 are positioned substantially symmetrically about the dividing line J in plan view.

  A positioning pin 102 is provided adjacent to the rear side of the tape drive shaft 100. A positioning pin 103 is provided adjacent to the front side of the guide shaft 120. The positioning pins 102 and 103 position the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 in the vicinity of the tape drive shaft 100 and the guide shaft 120, respectively.

  The electrical configuration of the tape printer 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the tape printer 1 includes a control circuit unit 600 formed on a control board. In the control circuit unit 600, a ROM 602, a CGROM 603, a RAM 604, and an input / output interface 611 are connected to the CPU 601 through a data bus 610.

  The ROM 602 stores various programs that the CPU 601 executes to control the tape printer 1. Tables (see FIGS. 40 and 44) for specifying the tape type of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting unit 8 are also stored in the ROM 602. The CGROM 603 stores printing dot pattern data for printing characters. The RAM 604 is provided with a plurality of storage areas such as a text memory and a print buffer.

  Connected to the input / output interface 611 are arm detection switches 210A to 210E, rear detection switches 310A to 310E, a keyboard 3, a liquid crystal drive circuit (LCDC) 605, drive circuits 606, 607, 608, and the like. The drive circuit 606 is an electronic circuit for driving the thermal head 10. The drive circuit 607 is an electronic circuit for driving the tape drive motor 23. The drive circuit 608 is an electronic circuit for driving the cutter motor 24. The cutter motor 24 moves the movable blade 19 in the front-rear direction in order to cut the printed tape 50. The LCDC 605 has a video RAM (not shown) for outputting display data to the display 5.

  Next, the tape cassette 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3, 5 to 8, and 15 to 44. For convenience of explanation, FIGS. 18, 19 and 32 show the cassette case 31 disassembled into an upper case 311 and a lower case 312 with the tapes and spools housed therein removed. However, in FIG. 32, the film tape 59, the ink ribbon 60, and members related thereto are illustrated. In FIG. 28, the film tape 59, the ink ribbon 60, and the regulating members 361 and 362 of the configuration in the vicinity of the separation unit 61 are indicated by phantom lines. In FIG. 29, a laminate-type tape cassette 30 with the upper case 311 removed is shown.

  A schematic configuration of the tape cassette 30 will be described. The tape cassette 30 is a general-purpose cassette that can be mounted on the above-described thermal type, receptor type, laminate type, and the like by appropriately changing the type of tape accommodated therein and the presence or absence of an ink ribbon.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 15 to 17, the tape cassette 30 includes a cassette case 31 that is a casing thereof. As a whole, the cassette case 31 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape (box shape) having rounded corners in plan view. The cassette case 31 includes an upper case 311 and a lower case 312. The lower case 312 includes a bottom plate 306 (see FIG. 20) that forms the bottom surface 302 of the cassette case 31. The upper case 311 includes an upper plate 305 (see FIG. 22) that forms the upper surface 301 of the cassette case 31, and is fixed to the upper portion of the lower case 312. The distance from the bottom surface 302 to the top surface 301 is referred to as the height of the tape cassette 30 or the cassette case 31.

  In the cassette case 31 of the present embodiment, the entire periphery of the upper plate 305 and the bottom plate 306 is surrounded by a peripheral wall forming a side surface, but it is not always necessary to be surrounded entirely. For example, an opening that exposes the inside of the cassette case 31 is provided on a part of the peripheral wall (for example, the back), or a boss that connects the upper plate 305 and the bottom plate 306 is provided at a position facing the opening. May be.

  The cassette case 31 has four corners 321 to 324 formed to have the same width (the same length in the vertical direction) regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30. In the following, the left rear corner is the first corner 321, the right rear corner is the second corner 322, the right front corner is the third corner 323, and the left front corner is the fourth corner 324. Call it. The first to third corner portions 321 to 323 protrude outward from the side surface of the cassette case 31 so as to form a right angle in plan view. The fourth corner portion 324 does not form a right angle because the discharge guide portion 49 is provided at the corner. The lower surfaces of the corner portions 321 to 324 are portions that are supported by the corner support portion 812 when the tape cassette 30 is attached to the cassette attachment portion 8.

  As shown in FIG. 16, pin holes 62 and 63 corresponding to the positioning pins 102 and 103 of the tape printer 1 are provided at two locations on the lower surface of the fourth corner 324 and the second corner 322. Specifically, a recess provided on the lower surface of the fourth corner 324 is a pin hole 62 into which the positioning pin 102 is inserted. A recess provided in the lower surface of the second corner 322 is a pin hole 63 into which the positioning pin 103 is inserted.

  3 and 17, the cassette case 31 has the same position and the same width as the corners 321 to 324 in the vertical direction (that is, the height direction in which the upper surface 301 and the bottom surface 302 face each other). A portion (including the corner portions 321 to 324) surrounding the side surface of the case 31 over the entire circumference is referred to as a common portion 32. Specifically, the common part 32 is a part having a symmetrical width in the vertical direction with respect to the center line N in the vertical direction of the cassette case 31 (see FIG. 39). The height of the tape cassette 30 differs depending on the width of the tape stored in the cassette case 31. On the other hand, the width (length in the vertical direction) T of the common portion 32 is set to the same dimension regardless of the width of the tape stored in the cassette case 31.

  Specifically, when the tape width of the tape cassette 30 increases (for example, 18 mm, 24 mm, 36 mm), the height of the cassette case 31 also increases accordingly. On the other hand, the width T (see FIG. 39) of the common portion 32 is constant at, for example, 12 mm regardless of the tape width. When the tape width is equal to or smaller than the width T of the common portion 32 (for example, 6 mm, 12 mm), the height (that is, width) of the cassette case 31 is a size obtained by adding a predetermined width to the width T of the common portion 32. It is constant at. In this case, the height of the cassette case 31 is the smallest.

  The cassette case 31 is provided with a plurality of four support holes 65 to 68 for rotatably supporting spools mounted in the cassette case 31. Hereinafter, the holes provided in the left rear portion, the right rear portion, and the right front portion of the cassette case 31 are referred to as a first tape support hole 65, a second tape support hole 66, and a ribbon support hole 67, respectively. A hole provided between the first tape support hole 65 and the ribbon support hole 67 in plan view is referred to as a take-up spool support hole 68.

  The first tape support hole 65 rotatably supports the first tape spool 40 (see FIG. 5). The second tape support hole 66 rotatably supports the second tape spool 41 (see FIG. 5). The ribbon support hole 67 rotatably supports the ribbon spool 42 (see FIG. 5). The take-up spool support hole 68 rotatably supports the ribbon take-up spool 44 (see FIG. 5). A clutch spring 340 (see FIG. 16) is attached to the lower part of the ribbon take-up spool 44. The clutch spring 340 is a coil spring that prevents the ink ribbon 60 taken up by the ribbon take-up spool 44 from rotating reversely.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, a first tape area 400, a second tape area 410, a first ribbon area 420 and a second ribbon area 440 are provided in the cassette case 31. The first tape area 400 and the second tape area 410 are areas in which tapes can be stored, respectively. The first ribbon area 420 is an area in which an unused ink ribbon 60 can be stored. The second ribbon area 440 is an area in which the ink ribbon 60 that has been used for printing (hereinafter, used ink ribbon 60) can be stored. The tape and ink ribbon 60 are stored and transported in the cassette case 31 such that the width direction of each of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is parallel to the vertical direction of the tape cassette 30.

  The first tape region 400 is a substantially circular region in plan view that occupies the left half of the cassette case 31 adjacent to the first corner portion 321. The second tape region 410 is a substantially circular region in plan view provided at the right rear portion in the cassette case 31 adjacent to the second corner portion 322. The first ribbon region 420 is a region provided at the right front portion in the cassette case 31 adjacent to the third corner portion 323 and the head insertion portion 39. The second ribbon area 440 is an area provided between the first tape area 400 and the first ribbon area 420 in the cassette case 31. The support holes 65 to 68 are provided at substantially central portions of the first tape region 400, the second tape region 410, the first ribbon region 420, and the second ribbon region 440, respectively, in plan view.

  In the laminate type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, three types of roll bodies of a double-sided adhesive tape 58, a film tape 59, and an ink ribbon 60 are accommodated in the cassette case 31. The double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 58 is a tape in which an adhesive is applied on both sides and a release paper is stuck on one side. The film tape 59 is a transparent tape having a printing surface on which printing using the ink ribbon 60 is performed. The ink ribbon 60 has an ink surface on which ink is applied on one surface.

  The first tape area 400 stores a double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40 with the release paper facing outward. In the second tape area 410, the film tape 59 wound around the second tape spool 41 with the printing surface facing inward is stored. In the first ribbon region 420, unused ink ribbons 60 wound around the ribbon spool 42 with the ink surface facing inward are stored. In the second ribbon region 440, the used ink ribbon 60 wound up on the ribbon winding spool 44 is stored.

  In the laminate-type tape cassette 30, the second tape spool 41 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view as the film tape 59 is pulled out. The film tape 59 pulled out from the second tape spool 41 is conveyed toward the right front corner of the cassette case 31 (lower right corner in FIGS. 5 and 6). At the right front corner of the cassette case 31, the film tape 59 is conveyed along the outer periphery of the ink ribbon 60 wound around the ribbon spool 42 and at a distance from the ink ribbon 60. Thereby, since the contact with the film tape 59 currently conveyed and the ink ribbon 60 wound around the ribbon spool 42 is suppressed, the film tape 59 can be conveyed stably.

  As the ink ribbon 60 is pulled out, the ribbon spool 42 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. The ink ribbon 60 drawn from the ribbon spool 42 is transported toward the transport pin 531. As the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is pulled out, the first tape spool 40 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. The double-sided adhesive tape 58 pulled out from the first tape spool 40 is conveyed toward the tape drive roller 46 provided at the left front corner of the cassette case 31 (lower left corner in FIGS. 5 and 6).

  In the receptor-type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 7, two types of roll bodies, that is, a printing tape 57 and an ink ribbon 60 are accommodated in the cassette case 31. The printing tape 57 is a single-sided tape having a printing surface on which printing using the ink ribbon 60 is performed, and having a release paper attached to the surface opposite to the printing surface. The first tape area 400 stores the printing tape 57 wound around the first tape spool 40 with the release paper facing outward. In the first ribbon region 420, unused ink ribbons 60 wound around the ribbon spool 42 are stored. In the second ribbon region 440, the used ink ribbon 60 wound up on the ribbon winding spool 44 is stored. Since nothing is stored in the second tape area 410, the second tape spool 41 is not provided.

  In the receptor-type tape cassette 30, the first tape spool 40 rotates clockwise in plan view as the printing tape 57 is pulled out. The printing tape 57 drawn out from the first tape spool 40 is conveyed toward the right front corner of the cassette case 31. As the ink ribbon 60 is pulled out, the ribbon spool 42 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. The ink ribbon 60 drawn from the ribbon spool 42 is transported toward the transport pin 531.

  In the thermal type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 8, one type of roll body of the thermal paper tape 55 is stored in the cassette case 31. The thermal paper tape 55 is a single-sided tape having a printing surface on which printing is performed by a thermal method and having a release paper attached to a surface opposite to the printing surface. In the first tape area 400, the thermal paper tape 55 wound around the first tape spool 40 with the release paper facing outward is stored. Since nothing is stored in the second tape area 410, the first ribbon area 420, and the second ribbon area 440, the second tape spool 41, the ribbon spool 42, and the ribbon take-up spool 44 are not provided.

  In the thermal type tape cassette 30, the first tape spool 40 rotates clockwise in plan view as the thermal paper tape 55 is pulled out. The thermal paper tape 55 pulled out from the first tape spool 40 is conveyed toward the right front corner of the cassette case 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, a bent portion 533 is erected on the right front corner of the cassette case 31, that is, on the right front side of the first ribbon region 420. The bent portion 533 is a pin that bends the tape transport path passing through the bent portion 533 at an acute angle along the outer periphery of the first ribbon region 420. The tape transported toward the left front corner of the cassette case 31 is transported toward the left front corner of the cassette case 31 via the bent portion 533 and guided into an arm portion 34 described later.

  The bent portion 533 is inserted into the shaft hole of the roller member 535 that is a cylindrical rotating body. The bent portion 533 supports the roller member 535 in a rotatable manner. The roller member 535 rotates in contact with the tape passing through the bent portion 533. With the rotation of the roller member 535, the tape passing through the bent portion 533 is smoothly sent out toward the left front corner of the cassette case 31.

  The conveying pin 531 is provided on the left side of the first ribbon region 420 and on the right front portion of the first cylindrical member 881B (see FIG. 18). The transport pin 531 is a pin that bends the transport path of the ink ribbon 60 toward the inside of the arm unit 34. The ink ribbon 60 drawn out from the ribbon spool 42 is guided into the arm portion 34 via the conveyance pin 531.

  On the right side of the first ribbon region 420, a regulation rib 532 is provided standing from the bottom plate 306. In other words, the regulation rib 532 is a plate-like member provided on the upstream side in the tape transport direction from the bent portion 533. The restriction rib 532 extends leftward from the right side surface of the cassette case 31 and has a left end located in the vicinity of the tape transport path. The regulation rib 532 does not contact the tape being conveyed, but contacts the tape that is about to move to the back surface (the surface opposite to the printing surface). That is, the restriction rib 532 restricts the tape from spreading in the vicinity of the first ribbon region 420.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 17, the front surface of the cassette case 31 is provided with a semicircular groove 84 that is a substantially semicircular groove portion in plan view. The semicircular groove 84 is provided across the vertical direction of the cassette case 31. The semicircular groove 84 is an escape portion provided so that the shaft support portion 121 of the platen holder 12 does not interfere with the cassette case 31 when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8.

  A portion of the front wall of the cassette case 31 that extends to the left from the semicircular groove 84 is the arm front wall 35. A wall portion provided in the vertical direction at a position spaced rearward from the arm front wall 35 is an arm back wall 37. A portion extending leftward from the right front portion of the tape cassette 30, which is defined by the arm front wall 35 and the arm rear wall 37, is the arm portion 34.

  The left end portion of the arm front wall 35 is bent rearward. A gap extending in the vertical direction between the arm front wall 35 and the left end of the arm back wall 37 is a discharge port 341. The discharge port 341 discharges the tape (and the ink ribbon 60) from the arm unit 34. A left end portion of the arm front wall 35 adjacent to the discharge port 341 is an arm tip portion 85. A portion of the arm tip portion 85 where the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are contacted and separated is a contact / separation portion 86. The arm front wall 35 is provided with an arm index portion 800 and a locking hole 820, details of which will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the arm portion 34, the tape drawn from the first tape spool 40 or the second tape spool 41 is guided along a transport path extending substantially parallel to the arm front wall 35. , And is discharged from the discharge port 341. The ink ribbon 60 pulled out from the ribbon spool 42 is guided along a transport path different from the tape in the arm portion 34 and discharged from the discharge port 341. However, in the laminate type tape cassette 30, the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 guided in the arm portion 34 are overlapped at the discharge port 341 and discharged. In the receptor type tape cassette 30, the print tape 57 and the ink ribbon 60 guided in the arm portion 34 are superposed at the discharge port 341 and discharged.

  A peripheral wall extending rearward from the right end portion of the arm back wall 37 and extending in parallel with the arm back wall 37 is a head peripheral wall 36. A substantially rectangular space in plan view that passes through the tape cassette 30 in the vertical direction and is defined by the arm back wall 37 and the head peripheral wall 36 is a head insertion portion 39. The head insertion portion 39 is connected to the outside also on the front surface side of the tape cassette 30 via an exposed portion 77 provided on the front surface side of the tape cassette 30. A head holder 74 that supports the thermal head 10 is inserted into the head insertion portion 39.

  In the exposed portion 77, one surface (back surface) of the tape discharged from the discharge port 341 is exposed forward, and the other surface (printing surface) faces the thermal head 10. The thermal head 10 performs printing on a tape located at the exposed portion 77. However, in the laminate type tape cassette 30, the printing surface of the film tape 59 discharged to the exposed portion 77 faces the thermal head 10 with the ink ribbon 60 interposed therebetween. In the receptor type tape cassette 30, the printing surface of the printing tape 57 discharged to the exposed portion 77 faces the thermal head 10 with the ink ribbon 60 interposed therebetween. The thermal head 10 performs printing using the ink ribbon 60 on the printing tape 57 or the film tape 59 located at the exposed portion 77.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8 and 17, a separation unit 61 is provided on the left side of the head insertion unit 39. The separation part 61 is a part for separating the tape used for printing and the ink ribbon 60 on the downstream side of the exposed part 77 in the tape transport direction. The separation unit 61 includes restriction members 361 and 362, a ribbon guide wall 38, an isolation wall 43, and the like.

  The regulating members 361 and 362 are a pair of upper and lower plate-like bodies that guide the tape on which printing has been performed toward the discharge guide portion 49. The ribbon guide wall 38 is a wall portion that guides the used ink ribbon 60 toward the ribbon take-up spool 44. The separating wall 43 allows the used ink ribbon 60 guided along the ribbon guide wall 38 and the double-sided adhesive tape 58 drawn out toward the tape driving roller 46 to come into contact with each other in the laminate type tape cassette 30. It is a wall part to prevent.

  An isolation wall 48 is provided between the ribbon guide wall 38 and the ribbon take-up spool 44. The isolation wall 48 is provided on the front side of the first tape region 400 and is provided along a part of the outer peripheral edge of the first tape region 400. In the separating wall 48, the used ink ribbon 60 guided from the ribbon guide wall 38 toward the ribbon take-up spool 44 and the double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40 come into contact with each other. It is the wall part which prevents.

  A roller support hole 64 is provided on the left side of the separation unit 61 (that is, on the downstream side in the tape transport direction). Inside the roller support hole 64, a tape drive roller 46 is rotatably supported. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, when the laminate type tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the film is removed from the second tape spool 41 by the cooperation of the tape drive roller 46 and the movable transport roller 14. The tape 59 is pulled out, and the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is pulled out from the first tape spool 40.

  The printed film tape 59 is guided downstream in the tape transport direction by the regulating members 361 and 362. When the film tape 59 after printing passes between the tape driving roller 46 and the movable conveying roller 14, the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is bonded to the printing surface of the film tape 59. The adhered film tape 59, that is, the printed tape 50 is conveyed toward the discharge guide portion 49.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the receptor type tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the print tape 57 is transferred from the first tape spool 40 by the cooperation of the tape drive roller 46 and the movable transport roller 14. Pulled out. The printing tape 57 after printing, that is, the printed tape 50 is guided to the downstream side in the tape conveying direction by the regulating members 361 and 362 and discharged between the tape driving roller 46 and the movable conveying roller 14. It is conveyed toward.

  As shown in FIG. 8, when the thermal type tape cassette 30 is mounted, the thermal paper tape 55 is pulled out from the first tape spool 40 by the cooperation of the tape driving roller 46 and the movable conveying roller 14. The printed thermal paper tape 55, that is, the printed tape 50, is guided downstream in the tape transport direction by the regulating members 361 and 362, and is discharged between the tape driving roller 46 and the movable transport roller 14 to the discharge guide portion 49. It is conveyed toward.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the discharge guide portion 49 is a plate-like member that extends from the front end portion of the left side surface of the cassette case 31 slightly forward and extends over the top surface 301 and the bottom surface 302. The discharge guide portion 49 guides the printed tape 50 conveyed via the tape drive roller 46 into a passage formed between the cassette case 31 and the front end portion on the left side surface. The printed tape 50 is discharged from the end of this passage to the outside of the tape cassette 30.

  A guide hole 47 into which the guide shaft 120 is inserted and removed when the tape cassette 30 is attached or detached is provided at the right rear portion of the cassette case 31. The opening shape of the guide hole 47 of the present embodiment is such that both sides parallel to the dividing line K (see FIG. 15) in a plan view are linear, and both sides substantially orthogonal to the dividing line K are the opening center of the guide hole 47. It has a curved shape such that the distance from is constant. In other words, the guide hole 47 is a long hole having a small opening width in a direction orthogonal to the dividing line K and extending along the dividing line K.

  The opening width of the guide hole 47 is larger than the diameter of the small diameter shaft portion 120B (see FIG. 45) of the guide shaft 120 in all directions passing through the opening center of the guide hole 47 in plan view. However, the guide hole 47 has the largest opening width at the dividing line K passing through the opening center of the guide hole 47 in plan view. The guide hole 47 has the smallest opening width in a line (imaginary line G shown in FIG. 15) that passes through the center of the opening of the guide hole 47 in a plan view and is orthogonal to the dividing line K. The opening width of the guide hole 47 in the virtual line G is substantially equal to the diameter of the large-diameter shaft portion 120A (see FIG. 45) of the guide shaft 120.

  As shown in FIGS. 16, 18, and 19, a rear recess 360 is provided at a substantially central position in the left-right direction at the rear portion of the cassette case 31. The rear recess 360 is a recess in which a part of the bottom plate 306 is recessed upward from the bottom surface 302. In other words, the rear concave portion 360 is a step portion formed between the first tape region 400, the second tape region 410, and the back surface of the cassette case 31.

  The rear recess 360 has a rear step wall 360 </ b> A that is a planar wall portion (a bottom portion of the recess) positioned above the bottom surface 302. The rear step wall 360A has a shape substantially corresponding to the rear support portion 813 (see FIG. 3), that is, a substantially triangular shape in a bottom view. The rear step wall 360 </ b> A is formed at the same height as the lower end portion of the common portion 32. Therefore, the distance from the center line N of the cassette case 31 to the rear stepped wall 360 </ b> A is constant regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30, similarly to the common portion 32. A rear indicator portion 900 described later is provided on the rear step wall 360A.

  The detailed structures of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 will be described with reference to FIGS. In particular, a structure for connecting the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 and a structure for regulating the position of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the width direction will be described separately for the upper case 311 and the lower case 312.

  The structure of the lower case 312 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21, 27, and 28. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the outer shape of the lower case 312 is formed by a bottom plate 306 and a lower peripheral wall 304. The lower peripheral wall 304 is a side wall extending upward at a predetermined height from the bottom plate 306 along the outer edge of the bottom surface 302. The wall part which comprises the lower part of the arm front wall 35 among the lower peripheral walls 304 is the lower arm front wall 35B. The wall portion that is erected from the bottom plate 306 so as to be separated from the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B rearward is a lower arm rear wall 37 </ b> B that constitutes a lower portion of the arm rear wall 37. The peripheral wall continuously extending to the lower arm rear wall 37 </ b> B is a lower head peripheral wall 36 </ b> B constituting a lower portion of the head peripheral wall 36.

  A detailed configuration around the head insertion portion 39 in the lower case 312 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 20, a first receiving portion 391 and a second receiving portion 392 are provided on the outer periphery of the head insertion portion 39 of the lower case 312. In other words, the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 are provided at positions facing the head insertion portion 39. The first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 are used for vertical positioning of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8.

  Specifically, the first receiving portion 391 and the second receiving portion 391 are provided at two locations on the upstream side and the downstream side in the tape transport direction with reference to the insertion position (specifically, the printing position) of the thermal head 10 (see FIG. 5). A receiving portion 392 is provided. The first receiving portion 391 is connected to the upstream end portion of the arm portion 34 in the tape transport direction and the upstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39. The second receiving portion 392 is connected to the downstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39.

  Each of the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 is a concave portion in which a part of the bottom plate 306 is recessed upward from the bottom surface 302. Further, the first receiving portion 391 is recessed from the head insertion portion 39 in a direction along the arm front wall 35. The second receiving portion 392 is recessed from the head insertion portion 39 in a direction orthogonal to the arm front wall 35. That is, the first receiving portion 391 and the second receiving portion 392 face the head insertion portion 39 in directions orthogonal to each other.

  The first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 each have a first lower flat surface portion 391B and a second lower flat surface portion 392B. The first and second lower flat surface portions 391B and 392B are lower surfaces of the flat surface portion (the bottom portion of the concave portion) in a substantially rectangular shape as viewed from the bottom surface and located above the bottom surface 302.

  Between the height position (that is, the vertical position) of the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B in the lower case 312 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and ink ribbon 60 stored in the cassette case 31. The distance is constant regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30, that is, even if the vertical height of the tape cassette 30 is different. Therefore, the greater the width of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 stored in the tape cassette 30, the greater the depth of the first receiving portion 391 relative to the height position of the first lower flat surface portion 391B, and The depth of the second receiving portion 392 is increased with reference to the height position of the second lower flat surface portion 392B.

  In the present embodiment, the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are located at the same distance in the vertical direction from the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60. That is, the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are at the same height position in the lower case 312. The center position in the width direction of the tape and ink ribbon 60 and the center position in the vertical direction of the cassette case 31 coincide with each other.

  The first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are reference surfaces in the lower case 312 respectively. The reference surface is a surface used as a reference in dimension setting or dimension measurement of a certain part. In the present embodiment, the first and second lower flat surface portions 391B and 392B are reference surfaces for various restricting portions that restrict the movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the width direction. Further, the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are respectively viewed from below by the first and second support portions 741 and 742 (see FIG. 5) when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, respectively. It also functions as a supported part.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 20, a locking portion 397 is provided on the outer periphery of the head insertion portion 39 of the lower case 312 (that is, the position facing the head insertion portion 39). Specifically, the locking portion 397 is provided at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the lower head peripheral wall 36B, and faces the lower arm rear wall 37B in the front-rear direction. The locking portion 397 is formed by cutting out a part above a predetermined height from the bottom surface 302 of the lower head peripheral wall 36B. The locking portion 397 (the upper end of the cut-out lower head peripheral wall 36B) locks the claw portion 752 (see FIG. 49) of the cassette hook 75 when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8. .

  The details of the portion constituting the vicinity of the arm portion 34 in the lower case 312 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the components of the arm portion 34 in the lower case 312 include a lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B, a lower arm rear wall 37 </ b> B, and a separation wall 33. The separation wall 33 is a wall portion provided between the lower arm front wall 35B and the lower arm rear wall 37B and extending upward from the bottom plate 306. A mold hole 850 is provided in the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower arm front wall 35B. The mold hole 850 is a part that is cut out from the upper part of the lower arm front wall 35B in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view. The mold hole 850 is a mold escape hole used when the lower case 312 is molded. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, a through hole is formed in the arm front wall 35.

  The separation wall 33 is formed highest among the three wall portions of the arm portion 34 (the lower arm front wall 35B, the lower arm rear wall 37B, and the separation wall 33). The height of the separation wall 33 is slightly larger than the width of the tape stored in the cassette case 31. Of the lower arm front wall 35B, the left part of the mold hole 850 has a height about half that of the separation wall 33, and the right part of the mold hole 850 has a height of about two-thirds of the separation wall 33. Have. The lower arm rear wall 37 </ b> B is slightly lower than the separation wall 33 and has a height substantially equal to the width of the ink ribbon 60. The right end portion of the separation wall 33 in a columnar shape in plan view is located substantially at the center of the arm portion 34. The left end of the separation wall 33 is in a position facing the mold hole 850 provided in the lower arm front wall 35B in the front-rear direction of the lower case 312.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the left side portion of the mold hole 850 in the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B is a lower tip portion 85 </ b> B that constitutes the lower portion of the arm tip portion 85. The upper end of the lower tip 85B is a lower contact / separation part 86B that constitutes the lower part of the contact / separation part 86. In the lower case 312, a groove formed on the right side of the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B is a lower semicircular groove 84 </ b> B that constitutes a lower portion of the semicircular groove 84.

  The lower tip portion 85B is provided with a tip hole portion 687 extending in the vertical direction. The tip hole portion 687 is a hole that penetrates the bottom plate 306 of the tape cassette 30 and is formed in a circular shape in plan view. The tip hole 687 may be formed as a concave hole that does not penetrate the bottom plate 306 of the tape cassette 30. The upper portion of the tip hole portion 687 is gradually widened upward so that the opening diameter of the upper end portion is maximized.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the component part of the arm portion 34 in the lower case 312, a tape transport path is formed between the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B and the separation wall 33. A transport path for the ink ribbon 60 is formed between the separation wall 33 and the lower arm back wall 37B. On these transport paths, there are provided restricting pieces that restrict the movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the width direction (that is, the vertical direction).

  Regarding the tape transport path, first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B for restricting the downward movement of the tape are provided at the lower ends of the left end portion and the right end portion of the separation wall 33, respectively. The first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B slightly protrude upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306 and extend forward to the lower arm front wall 35B. A separation wall restricting portion 383 that restricts the upward movement of the tape is provided at the upper end of the left end portion of the separation wall 33. The separation wall restricting portion 383 is a protruding piece that protrudes forward from the upper end of the separation wall 33. The vertical distance between the first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B and the separation wall restricting portion 383 is the same as the width of the tape.

  A detailed configuration of the left end portion of the separation wall 33 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 27, a separation wall restricting portion 383 and a first tape lower restricting portion 381B are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the separating wall 33, respectively. A first printing surface side regulating portion 389 is provided between the separation wall regulating portion 383 and the first tape lower regulating portion 381B. The first printing surface side restriction portion 389 is a bulging portion that slightly rises in the center in the left-right direction in plan view. Further, the first print surface side regulating portion 389 has a shape like a convex lens in which the center portion in the vertical direction slightly protrudes forward (right side in FIG. 27) in a side view. That is, the regulating surface 389A of the first printing surface side regulating portion 389 is slightly raised at the center portion from the peripheral portion in both the left-right direction and the up-down direction.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the separation wall restricting portion 383 is provided at a position higher than the lower arm front wall 35B. The first tape lower restriction portion 381B is provided behind the mold hole 850. The separation wall restricting portion 383 and the first tape lower restricting portion 381B are exposed in front of the lower arm front wall 35B in a state before the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312. Furthermore, the left end portion of the separation wall 33, that is, the separation wall restriction portion 383 and the first tape lower restriction portion 381B are adjacent to an arm index portion 800 described later in a front view (see FIG. 25). Therefore, the person can see the separation wall restricting portion 383, the first tape lower restricting portion 381B, and the arm index portion 800 from the front of the lower case 312 at the same time.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first ribbon lower restricting portion 387 </ b> B is provided at the lower end of the right end portion of the separation wall 33 with respect to the transport path of the ink ribbon 60. The first ribbon lower restricting portion 387 </ b> B restricts the downward movement of the ink ribbon 60. The first ribbon lower restricting portion 387B slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306, and extends rearward from the right end portion of the separation wall 33 to the lower arm rear wall 37B.

  The first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B, the separation wall restricting portion 383, and the first ribbon lower restricting portion 387B have a height in the lower case 312 with the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B as reference surfaces, respectively. The position is set.

  Specifically, the vertical distance between the projecting ends (upper ends) of the first tape lower restriction portions 381B and 382B and the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B is set according to the width of the tape. Yes. The vertical distance between the lower end of the separation wall restricting portion 383 and the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B is set according to the width of the tape. The vertical distance between the protruding end (upper end) of the first ribbon lower restricting portion 387B and the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B is set according to the width of the ink ribbon 60. As described above, the first and second lower flat surface portions 391B and 392B are provided in the vicinity of the upstream end portion and the downstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39, respectively. Therefore, each restricting portion provided in the arm portion 34 is close to the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B which are reference surfaces.

  Conventionally, the reference position (for example, the bottom part of the pin holes 62 and 63) used when setting the dimension of the restricting part and measuring the dimensions after manufacture is located away from the restricting part. There were cases in which the mold pieces for molding were different. In this case, there is a possibility that the dimensional error of the restriction portion of the manufactured tape cassette 30 becomes larger as the frame at the reference position becomes farther. Even if the same piece can be formed, if the reference position and the restricting portion are located at a distance, a measurement error may occur and the dimensional accuracy may be lowered. For this reason, in the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process, the operator strictly performs the dimension setting of the restricting portion and the dimension measurement after the manufacturing.

  If the distance between the restricting portion and the reference surface is made closer as in this embodiment, the measurement error is reduced and the possibility that both can be formed with the same piece is increased. As a result, the height position of each restricting portion can be accurately defined, and as a result, the transport accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be improved. The arm portion 34 is in the vicinity of the upstream side of the position (specifically, the exposed portion 77) where printing is performed by the thermal head 10 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10 can be improved as the transport accuracy of the tape in the arm portion 34 and the ink ribbon 60 is improved. In addition, the burden on the operator of strictly setting the dimensions of the restricting portion as described above is reduced.

  After the manufacture of the lower case 312, it is possible to easily manage the dimensions of each restricting portion with reference to the first and second lower flat portions 391 </ b> B and 392 </ b> B. For example, when the lower case 312 is inspected, the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B, which are reference surfaces, are placed on the placement surface of the jig, and the dimensions of each restricting portion are measured. At this time, since the distance between each regulating portion and the reference surface is short, the inspector can accurately measure the dimensions.

  The first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are provided at a certain distance in the vertical direction from the center position in the width direction of the tape and ink ribbon 60 stored in the cassette case 31. Therefore, the vertical positions of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 with respect to the vertical positions of the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B become clearer. As a result, the conveyance accuracy of the tape and ink ribbon 60 can be further improved.

  In the present embodiment, the center position in the width direction of the tape and ink ribbon 60 and the distance in the vertical direction from the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are constant regardless of the width of the tape and ink ribbon 60. Therefore, the height positions of the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B can be determined based on a uniform standard for a plurality of types of tape cassettes 30 having different widths of the tape to be stored and the ink ribbon 60. As a result, dimension measurement and component management of the cassette case 31 can be facilitated.

  Each restricting portion in the arm portion 34 is located between the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B in the left-right direction of the lower case 312 and is close to any reference plane. That is, dimension setting and dimension measurement can be performed using any one of the reference planes, or both reference planes can be used. By using both reference surfaces, the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing each regulating portion can be further increased. Therefore, the conveyance accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be further improved. In addition, after the lower case 312 is manufactured, the size management of each restricting portion can be performed more accurately and easily.

  Further, in the arm portion 34, not only the tape is restricted in the width direction, but also the movement toward the print surface side is restricted by the first print surface side restriction portion 389. Since the first printing surface side regulating portion 389 has a center portion in the left-right direction protruding forward, the tape conveyed in the arm portion 34 is bent toward the head insertion portion 39 side. Since the first printing surface side regulating portion 389 has the center portion in the vertical direction protruding forward, the tension of the tape is concentrated at the center portion in the width direction. As a result, since the back tension is applied to the tape conveyed in the arm portion 34, the running of the tape can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIG. 20, a bent portion 533 is provided in the vicinity of the third corner portion 323 further upstream than the arm portion 34 in the tape transport direction. At the lower end of the bent portion 533, a restricting portion 384B is provided. The restricting portion 384B restricts the downward movement of the tape in the same manner as the first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B. Therefore, similarly to the first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B, the dimension setting and dimension management of the restricting portion 384B may be performed using the adjacent first lower flat portion 391B as a reference plane.

  The detail of the part which comprises the isolation | separation part 61 vicinity in the lower case 312 is demonstrated. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20 and FIG. 28, the wall portion extending in the front-rear direction on the left side of the head insertion portion 39 in the lower head peripheral wall 36 </ b> B is a ribbon guide wall 38. In other words, the ribbon guide wall 38 is a wall portion that defines the downstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39 in the tape transport direction. The ribbon guide wall 38 is adjacent to the left side of the second receiving portion 392 in plan view.

  An isolation wall 43 is erected on the left side of the ribbon guide wall 38 and on the right side of an opening 64B described later. The isolation wall 43 is provided so as to draw a gentle arc in the front-rear direction of the cassette case 31 along a part of the opening 64B in plan view. In order to prevent the double-sided adhesive tape 58 from adhering, the surface on the opening 64B side of the isolation wall 43 is formed in a sawtooth shape in plan view. A regulating member 362 extending upward from the bottom plate 306 is provided on the left front side of the ribbon guide wall 38 and on the front side of the isolation wall 43.

  As described above, the tape and the ink ribbon 60 discharged from the arm portion 34 are guided into the separation portion 61 via the exposed portion 77. A vertically long gap formed between the ribbon guide wall 38 and the regulating member 362 functions as a lower portion of the inlet 61A. The introduction port 61 </ b> A is a part of the transport path of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 that communicates with the exposed portion 77. The introduction port 61 </ b> A guides the printed tape and the used ink ribbon 60 into the separation unit 61.

  A vertically long gap formed between the isolation wall 43 and the regulating member 362 functions as a lower portion of the tape guide port 61B. The tape guide port 61B is a part of the tape transport path that is continuously provided on the downstream side of the introduction port 61A. The tape guide port 61B guides the printed tape toward the front of the tape drive roller 46 (see FIG. 5).

  A vertically long gap formed between the ribbon guide wall 38 and the isolation wall 43 functions as a ribbon guide port 61C. The ribbon guide port 61C is a part of the transport path of the ink ribbon 60 provided continuously downstream of the introduction port 61A. The ribbon guide port 61C guides the used ink ribbon 60 toward the second ribbon region 440 (see FIG. 5).

  At the lower ends of the introduction port 61A and the ribbon guide port 61C, the upper surface of the bottom plate 306 forms a continuous flat surface without any irregularities. On the other hand, a second tape lower restriction portion 363 </ b> B that slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306 is provided across the base portion of the isolation wall 43 and the base portion of the restriction member 362. Therefore, the lower end portion of the tape guide port 61B (that is, the protruding end of the second tape lower restriction portion 363B) is located above the lower end portion of the introduction port 61A (that is, the upper surface of the bottom plate 306). In other words, the second tape lower restriction portion 363B forms a step so that the lower end portion of the tape guide port 61B is higher than the lower end portion of the introduction port 61A.

  The second tape lower restriction portion 363B restricts the downward movement of the tape via the tape guide port 61B. Further, the second tape lower restriction portion 363 </ b> B functions as a separation rib for peeling the used ink ribbon 60 from the tape that has been printed in the separation portion 61.

  At the upper end of the front end portion of the isolation wall 43, an isolation wall restricting portion 364 that is a protruding piece protruding forward is provided. The isolation wall restricting portion 364 restricts the upward movement of the tape via the tape guide port 61B. A protrusion 398 that is a pin protruding upward is provided on the upper portion of the isolation wall restricting portion 364. The vertical distance between the second tape lower restricting portion 363B and the separating wall restricting portion 364 is the same as the width of the tape.

  On the front end surface of the separation wall 43, second print surface side restricting portions 43A and 43B are provided. The second print surface side restricting portion 43 </ b> A is a stepped portion provided in a lower portion of the separating wall restricting portion 364 and slightly protruding forward from the front end surface of the separating wall 43. The second print surface side restricting portion 43B is a step portion provided at the base portion of the separating wall 43 and protruding slightly forward from the front end surface of the separating wall 43.

  The second tape lower restricting portion 363B and the separation wall restricting portion 364 are set at height positions in the lower case 312 with the adjacent second lower flat portion 392B as a reference plane. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (upper end) of the second tape lower restricting portion 363B and the second lower flat portion 392B, and the lower end of the isolation wall restricting portion 364 and the second lower flat portion 392B. The distance in the vertical direction is set according to the width of the tape. Therefore, it is possible to improve the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the second tape lower restricting portion 363B and the isolation wall restricting portion 364 using the second lower flat portion 392B as a reference surface. After the lower case 312 is manufactured, the dimensions of the second tape lower restricting portion 363B and the isolation wall restricting portion 364 can be easily managed.

  In the present embodiment, the second tape lower restriction portion 363 </ b> B and the separation wall restriction portion 364 are provided in the vicinity of the tape drive roller 46. Within the separating portion 61, the tape is positioned in the width direction by these restricting portions. Therefore, the tape can be accurately conveyed in parallel to the center line in the width direction of the tape from the separation unit 61 to the tape driving roller 46.

  Further, in the separating unit 61, not only the tape is regulated in the width direction, but also the movement to the printing surface side is regulated by the second printing surface side regulating units 43A and 43B. Since the second print surface side restricting portions 43A and 43B protrude forward, the tape passing through the tape guide port 61B is bent toward the tape drive roller 46 side. As a result, a back tension is applied to the tape passing through the tape guide port 61B, so that the running of the tape can be stabilized.

  Details of the first corner portion 321 and the second corner portion 322 of the lower case 312 and the portions constituting the tape and ink ribbon 60 storage area will be described. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18 to 20, the lower case 312 includes a third lower plane portion 321 </ b> B that is a lower surface of the first corner portion 321 and a fourth lower plane that is a lower surface of the second corner portion 322. Part 322B. The third lower plane portion 321 </ b> B and the fourth lower plane portion 322 </ b> B are both plane portions located above the bottom surface 302.

  The height positions of the third and fourth lower flat portions 321B and 322B in the lower case 312 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 are constant regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30. Therefore, the greater the width of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 stored in the tape cassette 30, the greater the distance from the bottom surface 302 to the third and fourth lower flat portions 321B and 322B.

  In the present embodiment, the third and fourth lower flat portions 321B and 322B are the same in the vertical direction from the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60, similarly to the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B. It is in a position separated by a distance. That is, the first to fourth lower flat portions 391B, 392B, 321B, and 322B are all at the same height position in the lower case 312. The third and fourth lower flat surface portions 321B and 322B are used as reference surfaces for the restriction portions that restrict the downward movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the lower case 312 includes a first lower tape region 400B, a second lower tape region 410B, a first lower ribbon region 420B, and a second lower ribbon region 440B. The first lower tape area 400B constitutes the lower part of the first tape area 400. The second lower tape area 410B constitutes a lower portion of the second tape area 410. The first lower ribbon region 420B constitutes a lower portion of the first ribbon region 420. The second lower ribbon region 440B constitutes a lower portion of the second ribbon region 440.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first lower tape region 400 </ b> B is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306. Specifically, an annular protrusion is provided at the center position of the first lower tape region 400B where the first tape spool 40 (see FIG. 5) is disposed. Three linear protrusions extend radially from the annular protrusion to the periphery of the first lower tape region 400B. These protrusions are the third tape lower restriction portions 401B. The third tape lower restricting portion 401B restricts the downward movement of the tape (see FIGS. 5 to 8) housed in the first tape region 400.

  In the third tape lower restriction portion 401B, the height position of the lower case 312 is set with the adjacent third lower flat portion 321B as a reference surface. Specifically, the distance in the vertical direction between the protruding end (upper end) of the third tape lower restricting portion 401B and the third lower flat portion 321B is set according to the tape width. Therefore, it is possible to increase the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the third tape lower restricting portion 401B using the third lower flat portion 321B as a reference surface. After the lower case 312 is manufactured, the dimension management of the third tape lower restricting portion 401B can be easily performed.

  A second ribbon lower restricting portion 388 </ b> B is provided at the rear end portion of the ribbon guide wall 38. The second ribbon lower restricting portion 388 </ b> B restricts the downward movement of the ink ribbon 60 conveyed from the separating portion 61 to the second ribbon region 440. The second ribbon lower restricting portion 388B slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306, and extends rearward to the front of the first lower tape region 400B.

  The height of the second ribbon lower restricting portion 388B in the lower case 312 is set with the adjacent second lower flat portion 392B as a reference surface. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (upper end) of the second ribbon lower restriction portion 388 </ b> B and the second lower flat portion 392 </ b> B is set according to the width of the ink ribbon 60. Therefore, it is possible to improve the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the second ribbon lower restricting portion 388B using the second lower flat portion 392B as a reference surface. After the lower case 312 is manufactured, the dimension management of the second ribbon lower restricting portion 388B can be easily performed.

  Similar to the first lower tape area 400B, the second lower tape area 410B is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306. Specifically, an annular protrusion is provided at the center position of the second lower tape region 410B where the second tape spool 41 (see FIG. 5) is disposed. Eight linear protrusions extend radially from the annular protrusion to the periphery of the second lower tape region 410B. These protrusions are the fourth tape lower restriction portions 411B. The fourth tape lower restriction portion 411B restricts the downward movement of the tape (see FIGS. 5 and 6) stored in the second tape area 410.

  The fourth tape lower restricting portion 411B is set at a height position in the lower case 312 with the adjacent fourth lower flat portion 322B as a reference surface. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (upper end) of the fourth tape lower restricting portion 411B and the fourth lower flat surface portion 322B is set according to the tape width. Therefore, it is possible to increase the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the fourth tape lower restricting portion 411B using the fourth lower flat portion 322B as a reference surface. After the lower case 312 is manufactured, the size management of the fourth tape lower restricting portion 411B can be easily performed.

  The first lower ribbon region 420B is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the bottom plate 306. Specifically, the protrusion provided annularly at the center position of the first lower ribbon region 420B where the ribbon spool 42 (see FIG. 5) is disposed is the third ribbon lower restriction portion 421B. The third ribbon lower regulating portion 421B regulates the downward movement of the unused ink ribbon 60 (see FIGS. 5 to 7) stored in the first ribbon area 420.

  The height of the third ribbon lower restricting portion 421B in the lower case 312 is set with the adjacent first lower flat surface portion 391B as a reference surface. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (upper end) of the third ribbon lower restricting portion 421B and the first lower flat surface portion 391B is set according to the width of the ink ribbon 60. Therefore, it is possible to increase the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the third ribbon lower restricting portion 421B using the first lower flat surface portion 391B as a reference surface. After the lower case 312 is manufactured, the dimension management of the third ribbon lower restricting portion 421B can be easily performed.

  In the present embodiment, the protruding ends of the first to fourth tape lower restricting portions 381B, 382B, 363B, 401B, and 411B are all set at the same height position regardless of their arrangement positions. Therefore, the tape stored in the first tape area 400 and the tape stored in the second tape area 410 move downward at the same height position as the tape existing in the arm part 34 and the separation part 61, respectively. Is regulated.

  Further, the protruding ends of the first to third ribbon lower restricting portions 387B, 388B, and 421B are all set at the same height position regardless of the arrangement positions thereof. Accordingly, the ink ribbon 60 accommodated in the first ribbon region 420 is restricted from moving downward at the same height as the ink ribbon 60 present in the arm portion 34 and the separation portion 61.

  The lower case 312 is provided with a cylindrical member and a connection hole for joining the upper case 311 and the lower case 312.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, a cylindrical first cylindrical member 881 </ b> B is erected on the upper side of the first receiving portion 391. In other words, the first cylindrical member 881B is provided above the first lower flat portion 391B in the vertical direction. The first cylindrical member 881B is in contact with the lower head peripheral wall 36B, but is separated from the lower peripheral wall 304.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the first cylindrical member 881 </ b> B has a cylindrical hole portion 891. The cylindrical hole portion 891 is a concave portion that is formed along the axis of the first cylindrical member 881B and has a circular shape in plan view. The diameter of the cylindrical hole portion 891 is gradually increased upward so as to be maximum at the upper end portion of the cylindrical hole portion 891. The configurations of second to seventh cylindrical members 882B, 883B, 884B, 885B, 886B, and 887B described later are the same as the configurations of the first cylindrical member 881B.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, a second cylindrical member 882B is provided on the rear side of the tape drive roller 46 (specifically, an opening 64B described later) and on the left front side of the first lower tape region 400B. It has been. On the opposite side across the plane center of the first lower tape region 400B (specifically, an opening 65B described later) with respect to the second cylindrical member 882B, that is, on the right rear side of the first lower tape region 400B, the fourth A cylindrical member 884B is provided. A third cylindrical member 883B is provided on the back surface of the third lower flat portion 321B, that is, on the left rear side of the first lower tape region 400B.

  That is, the second to fourth cylindrical members 882B, 883B, and 884B are provided along the outer periphery of the first lower tape region 400B in the lower case 312. The third and fourth cylindrical members 883B and 884B are in contact with the first peripheral wall 70 erected along a part of the outer peripheral edge of the first lower tape region 400B. The second to fourth cylindrical members 882B, 883B, and 884B are provided apart from the lower peripheral wall 304 of the lower case 312.

  A fifth cylindrical member 885B is provided on the back surface of the fourth lower flat portion 322B, that is, on the right rear side of the second lower tape region 410B. On the opposite side across the plane center of the second lower tape area 410B (specifically, the lower tape support portion 66B described below) with respect to the fifth cylindrical member 885B, that is, on the left front side of the second lower tape area 410B, Six cylindrical members 886B are provided. A seventh cylindrical member 887B is provided on the back surface of the lower surface of the third corner portion 323, that is, on the right front side of the first lower ribbon region 420B.

  That is, the fifth and sixth cylindrical members 885 </ b> B and 886 </ b> B are provided along the outer periphery of the second lower tape region 410 </ b> B in the lower case 312. The fifth and sixth cylindrical members 885B and 886B are in contact with the second peripheral wall 71 erected along a part of the outer peripheral edge of the second lower tape region 410B. The fifth to seventh cylindrical members 885B, 886B, and 887B are provided to be separated from the lower peripheral wall 304 of the lower case 312.

  A first connection hole 871B is provided slightly below the upper end of the left portion of the lower semicircular groove 84B of the lower case 312. A second connection hole 872B (see FIG. 28) and a third connection hole 873B (see FIG. 30) are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the locking portion 397 in the lower head peripheral wall 36B. The second connection hole 872B is provided above the second lower flat surface portion 392B.

  The rear wall portion included in the lower peripheral wall 304 of the lower case 312 is a rear wall 370 that constitutes the lower portion of the rear surface of the cassette case 31. The rear wall 370 is provided with a fourth connection hole 874B and a fifth connection hole 875B. The fourth connection hole 874B is provided on the left rear side of the first lower tape region 400B. The fifth connection hole 875B is provided on the rear side of the second lower tape region 410B. The first to fifth connection holes 871B, 872B, 873B, 874B, and 875B are rectangular through holes that are long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front or the back.

  A left inner wall 861 is provided on the rear side of the second cylindrical member 882B and on the left front side of the first lower tape region 400B. A right inner wall 862 is provided on the right front side of the second lower tape area 410B and on the right rear side of the first lower ribbon area 420B. The left inner wall 861 and the right inner wall 862 are wall portions having a rectangular frame shape in plan view provided slightly inside the lower peripheral wall 304. The left inner wall 861 is provided with a sixth connection hole 876B that is a rectangular through hole that is long in the front-rear direction in a side view. The right inner wall 862 is provided with a seventh connection hole 877B that is a rectangular through hole that is long in the front-rear direction in a side view.

  The structure of the upper case 311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15, 17 to 19, 22, 23, 27, and 28. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the outer shape of the upper case 311 is formed by an upper plate 305 (see FIG. 22) and an upper peripheral wall 303. The upper peripheral wall 303 is a side wall extending downward at a predetermined height from the upper plate 305 along the outer edge of the upper surface 301. Of the upper peripheral wall 303, the wall portion constituting the upper portion of the arm front wall 35 is the upper arm front wall 35 </ b> A. A wall portion that is spaced rearward from the upper arm front wall 35 </ b> A and extends downward from the upper plate 305 is an upper arm rear wall 37 </ b> A that constitutes an upper portion of the arm rear wall 37. The peripheral wall extending continuously from the upper arm rear wall 37 </ b> A is the upper head peripheral wall 36 </ b> A that constitutes the upper portion of the head peripheral wall 36.

  A detailed configuration around the head insertion portion 39 in the upper case 311 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 22, a press receiving portion 393 is provided so as to be connected to the upstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39 of the upper case 311 in the tape transport direction. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the presser receiving portion 393 overlaps the first receiving portion 391 vertically. The presser receiving portion 393 is a concave portion in which a part of the upper plate 305 is recessed downward from the upper surface 301. The presser receiving portion 393 is recessed from the head insertion portion 39 in the direction along the arm front wall 35, similarly to the first receiving portion 391.

  The presser foot receiving portion 393 has a first upper flat surface portion 393A. The first upper flat surface portion 393A is an upper surface of a substantially rectangular flat surface portion (a bottom portion of the concave portion) in a plan view located below the upper surface 301. The distance between the height position (that is, the vertical position) of the first upper flat portion 393A in the upper case 311 and the central position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 stored in the cassette case 31 is the tape cassette 30. It is constant regardless of the tape type. Therefore, as the width of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 stored in the tape cassette 30 is wider, the depth of the press receiving portion 393 with respect to the height position of the first upper plane portion 393A is increased.

  The first upper plane portion 393A is a reference plane in the upper case 311. In the present embodiment, the first upper flat surface portion 393A is provided as a reference surface for various restricting portions that restrict upward movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60. Further, the first upper plane portion 393A may be a portion that is pressed from above by the head pressing member 7 (see FIG. 2) when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 and the cassette cover 6 is closed. Function.

  A first lower flat surface portion 391B (see FIG. 16) of the lower case 312 is located immediately below the first upper flat surface portion 393A. In other words, the first upper plane portion 393A and the first lower plane portion 391B are at least partially opposed in the vertical direction of the tape cassette 30. An inclined portion 394 is provided behind the first upper plane portion 393A. The inclined portion 394 is a side surface of the presser receiving portion 393 extending from the rear end of the first upper plane portion 393A to the upper surface 301 and inclined upward and rearward from the rear end of the first upper plane portion 393A.

  Details of a portion constituting the vicinity of the arm portion 34 in the upper case 311 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 and 22, the constituent parts of the arm portion 34 in the upper case 311 include an upper arm front wall 35 </ b> A and an upper arm rear wall 37 </ b> A. The upper arm front wall 35A and the upper arm rear wall 37A respectively correspond to the lower arm front wall 35B and the lower arm rear wall 37B of the lower case 312. Therefore, the height of the upper arm front wall 35A is larger than that of the upper arm rear wall 37A.

  The upper plate 305 is provided with a fixing groove 331 at a position corresponding to the separation wall 33 of the lower case 312. The fixed groove 331 is a groove having the same shape as the separation wall 33 in plan view. When the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are assembled, the upper end portion 330 of the separation wall 33 is fitted into the fixing groove 331, and the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are fixed (see FIG. 27).

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the left end portion of the upper arm front wall 35 </ b> A is an upper tip portion 85 </ b> A that constitutes the upper portion of the arm tip portion 85. The lower end of the upper tip portion 85A is an upper contact / separation portion 86A that constitutes the upper portion of the contact / separation portion 86. A groove formed on the right side of the upper arm front wall 35 </ b> A in the upper case 311 is an upper semicircular groove 84 </ b> A that constitutes an upper portion of the semicircular groove 84. The left half of the upper semicircular groove 84A is provided with a recess 684 formed in a concave shape in plan view. The depth of the recessed portion of the recessed portion 684 is substantially the same as the thickness of the wall forming the lower semicircular groove 84B of the lower case 312.

  A convex portion 689 that protrudes downward is provided on the upper and separating portion 86A. The convex portion 689 is a substantially cylindrical body formed smaller than the diameter of the tip hole portion 687. The convex portion 689 is gradually thinner from the upper side to the lower end slightly from the center in the vertical direction. That is, the shaft diameter of the convex portion 689 gradually decreases toward the tip (lower end).

  As shown in FIG. 22, a tape transport path is formed between the upper arm front wall 35 </ b> A and the fixing groove 331 in the component portion of the arm portion 34 in the upper case 311. A transport path for the ink ribbon 60 is formed between the fixed groove 331 and the upper arm rear wall 37A. On these transport paths, similarly to the lower case 312, a regulating piece for regulating upward movement of the tape or the ink ribbon 60 is provided.

  Regarding the tape transport path, a first tape upper regulating portion 381A is provided in contact with the left end portion of the fixed groove 331. A first tape upper restriction portion 382A is provided in contact with the right end portion of the fixed groove 331. The first tape upper restricting portions 381A and 382A slightly protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper plate 305 and extend forward to the upper arm front wall 35A. The first tape upper regulating portions 381A and 382A regulate the upward movement of the tape, respectively.

  Regarding the transport path of the ink ribbon 60, a first ribbon upper restricting portion 387A that restricts the upward movement of the ink ribbon 60 is provided in contact with the right end portion of the fixing groove 331. The first ribbon upper restricting portion 387A slightly protrudes downward from the lower surface of the upper plate 305 and extends rearward to the upper arm rear wall 37A.

  The first tape upper restricting portions 381A and 382A and the first ribbon upper restricting portion 387A are set at height positions in the upper case 311 with the first upper flat portion 393A as a reference plane.

  Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding ends (lower ends) of the first tape upper restricting portions 381A and 382A and the first upper flat surface portion 393A is set according to the width of the tape. The vertical distance between the protruding end of the first ribbon upper restricting portion 387A and the first upper flat portion 393A is set according to the width of the ink ribbon 60. As described above, the first upper flat surface portion 393A is in the vicinity of the upstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39. That is, each restricting portion provided in the arm portion 34 is close to the first upper flat surface portion 393A which is a reference surface.

  Therefore, using the first upper flat surface portion 393A as a reference surface, the dimensional accuracy at the time of manufacture of each restricting portion can be increased, and as a result, the conveyance accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be improved. The arm portion 34 is in the vicinity of the upstream side of the position (specifically, the exposed portion 77) where printing is performed by the thermal head 10 (see FIG. 5). Therefore, the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10 can be improved as the transport accuracy of the tape in the arm portion 34 and the ink ribbon 60 is improved.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the lower case 312, the upper case 311 is also provided with a restriction portion in the arm portion 34. Thereby, the movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the width direction is further restricted in the arm portion 34. Therefore, the conveyance accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 and consequently the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10 can be further improved. In addition, after the manufacture of the upper case 311, it is possible to easily manage the dimensions of each restricting portion on the basis of the first upper plane portion 393 </ b> A.

  The first upper plane portion 393A is provided at a certain distance in the vertical direction from the center position in the width direction of the tape and ink ribbon 60 housed in the cassette case 31. Therefore, the position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 with respect to the vertical position of the first upper flat portion 393A becomes clearer, and the conveyance accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be further improved.

  The detail of the part which comprises the isolation | separation part 61 vicinity in the upper case 311 is demonstrated. As shown in FIGS. 18 to 19, 22 and 28, the upper plate 305 is provided with a fixing groove 332 at a position corresponding to the isolation wall 43 of the lower case 312. The fixed groove 332 is a groove portion having the same shape as the isolation wall 43 in plan view. A fixing hole 399 having the same diameter as the protrusion 398 is provided at a position corresponding to the protrusion 398 provided in the isolation wall 43. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the upper end portion of the isolation wall 43 is fitted into the fixing groove 332, and the protruding portion 398 is fitted into the fixing hole 399, so that the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are fixed. Is done.

  A regulating member 361 extending downward from the upper plate 305 is provided in front of the fixed groove 332. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, a vertically long gap formed between the ribbon guide wall 38 and the regulating member 361 functions as an upper portion of the introduction port 61A. A vertically long gap formed between the isolation wall 43 and the regulating member 361 functions as an upper portion of the tape guide port 61B. A portion of the upper plate 305 that extends to the right side from the fixed groove 332 is a wall portion that forms the upper end portion of the ribbon guide port 61C.

  At the upper end of the introduction port 61A and the upper end of the ribbon guide port 61C, the lower surface of the upper plate 305 forms a continuous flat surface without any irregularities. On the other hand, a second tape upper restricting portion 363A that slightly protrudes downward from the upper plate 305 is provided across the fixing groove 332 and the base portion of the restricting member 361. In other words, the second tape upper restricting portion 363A is provided at a position corresponding to the second tape lower restricting portion 363B of the lower case 312 in the vertical direction, and functions as the upper end portion of the tape guide port 61B. The upper end portion of the tape guide port 61B (that is, the protruding end of the second tape upper restriction portion 363A) is located below the upper end portion of the introduction port 61A (that is, the lower surface of the upper plate 305). In other words, the second tape upper restricting portion 363A forms a step so that the upper end portion of the tape guide port 61B is lower than the upper end portion of the introduction port 61A.

  In a state where the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the second tape upper restricting portion 363 </ b> A is arranged side by side with the isolation wall restricting portion 364 of the lower case 312. At this time, the protruding end (lower end) of the second tape upper restricting portion 363A and the lower end of the isolation wall restricting portion 364 are aligned at the same height position. Accordingly, the second tape upper restriction portion 363A, together with the isolation wall restriction portion 364, restricts the upward movement of the tape via the tape guide port 61B.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the lower case 312, the upper case 311 is also provided with a restriction portion in the separation portion 61. As a result, the movement of the tape in the width direction is further restricted within the separating portion 61. Therefore, the tape can be transported from the separating portion 61 to the tape drive roller 46 with higher accuracy and in parallel with the center line in the width direction of the tape.

  Details of the first corner portion 321, the second corner portion 322, and the portion constituting the tape and ink ribbon 60 storage area in the upper case 311 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18, 19, and 22, the upper case 311 includes a second upper plane portion 321 </ b> A that is an upper surface of the first corner portion 321 and a third upper plane portion 322 </ b> A that is an upper surface of the second corner portion 322. including. The second upper plane portion 321 </ b> A and the third upper plane portion 322 </ b> A are both plane portions located below the upper surface 301. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the second upper plane portion 321A and the third upper plane portion 322A are respectively the third lower plane portion 321B and the fourth lower plane portion 322B (see FIG. 16). ) And up and down.

  The distance between the height positions of the second and third upper plane portions 321A and 322A in the upper case 311 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is constant regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30. . Therefore, as the width of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 stored in the tape cassette 30 is wider, the distance from the upper surface 301 to the second and third upper flat portions 321A and 322A is increased.

  In the present embodiment, the second and third upper plane portions 321A and 322A are, as in the case of the first upper plane portion 393A, the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 (in this embodiment, the vertical direction of the cassette case 31). It is located at the same distance in the vertical direction from the center position. That is, the first to third upper plane portions 393A, 321A, 322A are all at the same height position in the upper case 311. The second and third upper plane portions 321A and 322A are used as reference surfaces for the restriction portions that restrict upward movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60.

  The upper case 311 includes a first upper tape area 400A, a second upper tape area 410A, a first upper ribbon area 420A, and a second upper ribbon area 440A. The first upper tape area 400A constitutes the upper part of the first tape area 400. The second upper tape area 410A constitutes the upper part of the second tape area 410. The first upper ribbon region 420A constitutes the upper part of the first ribbon region 420. The second upper ribbon region 440A constitutes the upper part of the second ribbon region 440.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the first upper tape region 400 </ b> A is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes slightly downward from the lower surface of the upper plate 305. Specifically, an annular protrusion is provided at the center position of the first upper tape region 400A where the first tape spool 40 (see FIG. 5) is disposed. Three linear protrusions extend radially from the annular protrusion to the periphery of the first upper tape region 400A. These protrusions are the third tape upper restriction portion 401A.

  The third tape upper restriction portion 401 </ b> A restricts upward movement of the tape (see FIGS. 5 to 8) stored in the first tape region 400. That is, the tape stored in the first tape region 400 is positioned in the width direction by the third tape upper restricting portion 401A and the third tape lower restricting portion 401B (see FIG. 20).

  In the third tape upper restricting portion 401A, the height position in the upper case 311 is set with the adjacent second upper flat portion 321A as a reference plane. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (lower end) of the third tape upper restricting portion 401A and the second upper flat portion 321A is set according to the width of the tape. Therefore, it is possible to improve the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the third tape upper restriction portion 401A using the second upper flat surface portion 321A as a reference surface. After the upper case 311 is manufactured, the dimension management of the third tape upper restriction portion 401A can be easily performed.

  A second ribbon upper restricting portion 388A that slightly protrudes downward from the lower surface of the upper plate 305 is provided slightly to the right of the rear end portion of the fixing groove 332. The second ribbon upper restricting portion 388A is provided at a position corresponding to the second ribbon lower restricting portion 388B of the lower case 312 in the vertical direction. The second ribbon upper restricting portion 388 </ b> A restricts the upward movement of the ink ribbon 60 conveyed from the separating portion 61 to the second ribbon region 440. That is, the ink ribbon 60 transported from the separation unit 61 to the second ribbon region 440 is moved in the width direction in the cassette case 31 by the second ribbon upper regulating unit 388A and the second ribbon lower regulating unit 388B (see FIG. 20). Positioned.

  Similar to the first upper tape region 400A, the second upper tape region 410A is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes slightly downward from the lower surface of the upper plate 305. Specifically, an annular protrusion is provided at the center position of the second upper tape region 410A where the second tape spool 41 (see FIG. 5) is disposed. Eight linear protrusions extend radially from the annular protrusion to the periphery of the second upper tape region 410A. These protrusions are the fourth tape upper restriction portion 411A.

  The fourth tape upper restricting portion 411A restricts the upward movement of the tape (see FIGS. 5 and 6) stored in the second tape region 410. That is, the tape stored in the second tape region 410 is positioned in the width direction by the fourth tape upper restricting portion 411A and the fourth tape lower restricting portion 411B (see FIG. 20).

  The fourth tape upper restriction portion 411A has a height position in the upper case 311 with the adjacent third upper plane portion 322A as a reference plane. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (lower end) of the fourth tape upper restricting portion 411A and the third upper flat portion 322A is set according to the tape width. Therefore, it is possible to improve the dimensional accuracy when the fourth tape upper regulating portion 411A is manufactured using the third upper plane portion 322A as a reference surface. After the manufacture of the upper case 311, the size management of the fourth tape upper restricting portion 411 </ b> A can be easily performed.

  The first upper ribbon region 420A is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes slightly downward from the lower surface of the upper plate 305. Specifically, the protrusion provided in an annular shape at the center position of the first upper ribbon region 420A where the ribbon spool 42 (see FIG. 5) is disposed is the third ribbon upper restriction portion 421A. The third ribbon upper restricting portion 421 </ b> A restricts the upward movement of the unused ink ribbon 60 (see FIGS. 5 to 7) stored in the first ribbon region 420. That is, the ink ribbon 60 accommodated in the first ribbon region 420 is positioned in the width direction by the third ribbon upper restriction portion 421A and the third ribbon lower restriction portion 421B (see FIG. 20).

  In the third ribbon upper restricting portion 421A, the height position in the upper case 311 is set with the adjacent first upper flat portion 393A as a reference plane. Specifically, the vertical distance between the protruding end (lower end) of the third ribbon upper restricting portion 421 </ b> A and the first upper plane portion 393 </ b> A is set according to the width of the ink ribbon 60. Therefore, it is possible to increase the dimensional accuracy when manufacturing the third ribbon upper restricting portion 421A using the first upper flat surface portion 393A as a reference surface. After the upper case 311 is manufactured, the dimension management of the third ribbon upper restricting portion 421A can be easily performed.

  In the present embodiment, the protruding ends of the first to fourth tape upper restricting portions 381A, 382A, 363A, 401A, and 411A and the lower ends of the separating wall restricting portion 364 and the separation wall restricting portion 383 are at their respective arrangement positions. Regardless, they are all set at the same height. Therefore, the tape stored in the first tape area 400 and the tape stored in the second tape area 410 move upward at the same height position as the tape existing in the arm part 34 and the separation part 61, respectively. Is regulated.

  Further, the protruding ends of the first to third ribbon upper regulating portions 387A, 388A, and 421A are all set at the same height position regardless of the arrangement positions thereof. Therefore, the ink ribbon 60 accommodated in the first ribbon region 420 and the ink ribbon 60 heading from the separation unit 61 to the second ribbon region 440 are respectively at the same height position as the ink ribbon 60 present in the arm unit 34, respectively. Movement in the direction is restricted.

  Accordingly, in the receptor type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 7, the print tape 57 can be accurately conveyed in parallel to the center line in the width direction across the first tape region 400, the arm portion 34, and the separation portion 61. In the thermal type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 8, the thermal paper tape 55 can be accurately conveyed in parallel to the center line in the width direction over the first tape region 400, the arm portion 34, and the separation portion 61.

  In the laminate type tape cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the film tape 59 can be accurately conveyed in parallel to the center line in the width direction across the second tape region 410, the arm portion 34, and the separation portion 61. At the same time, the double-sided adhesive tape 58 accommodated in the first tape region 400 can be accurately conveyed in parallel to the center line in the width direction toward the tape drive roller 46. As a result, the width direction position of the double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 58 and the film tape 59 can be matched with high accuracy.

  In the receptor-type and laminate-type tape cassette 30, the ink ribbon 60 can be accurately conveyed in parallel to the center line in the width direction over the first ribbon region 420, the arm portion 34, and the second ribbon region 440. Therefore, in any type of tape cassette 30, the conveyance accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60, and hence the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10, can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting ends of the first to fourth tape lower restriction portions 381B, 382B, 363B, 401B, and 411B, the lower ends of the isolation wall restriction portion 364 and the separation wall restriction portion 383, and the first to third ribbon lower restriction portions. The protruding ends of the portions 387B, 388B, and 421B are all set at the same height position. In other words, the movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the downward direction is restricted at the same height position by the restricting portions provided in the lower case 312.

  Further, the protruding ends of the first to fourth tape upper restricting portions 381A, 382A, 363A, 401A, 411A and the protruding ends of the first to third ribbon upper restricting portions 387A, 388A, 421A are all at the same height position. Is set. In other words, the upward movement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is restricted at the same height by the restricting portions provided in the upper case 311.

  Therefore, in the receptor type tape cassette 30, the printing tape 57 and the ink ribbon 60 can be accurately conveyed in a state in which the positions in the width direction coincide with each other. In the laminate type tape cassette 30, the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 can be accurately conveyed in a state in which the positions in the width direction coincide with each other. Therefore, the conveyance accuracy of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 and consequently the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10 can be further improved.

  The upper case 311 is provided with a press-fit pin and a connecting arm for joining the upper case 311 and the lower case 312.

  As shown in FIGS. 18, 19, and 22, the presser receiving portion 393 is provided with a first press-fit pin 881 </ b> A that protrudes downward. In other words, the first press-fit pin 881A is provided below the first upper plane portion 393A in the vertical direction. The first press-fit pin 881A is provided at a position corresponding to the first cylindrical member 881B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312 in the first upper plane portion 393A.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a cylindrical portion 393B is provided below the presser receiving portion 393. The cylindrical portion 393B is a cylindrical body that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the presser receiving portion 393 (the back surface of the first upper flat portion 393A). The first press-fit pin 881A extends downward from the center of the bottom surface of the cylindrical portion 393B. The column portion 393B determines the height of the tape cassette 30 by contacting the upper end portion of the first cylindrical member 881B.

  The first press-fit pin 881A includes a column portion 896 and a protruding member 897. The column portion 896 is a substantially columnar shaft extending downward from the center of the bottom surface of the column portion 393B. Of the support column 896, a portion slightly below the center in the vertical direction is a support column tip 898. The shaft diameter of the column front end portion 898 is gradually decreased downward so as to be minimum at the lower end portion of the column front end portion 898. The shaft diameter of the lower end portion of the support tip portion 898 is smaller than the diameter of the cylindrical hole portion 891 (see FIG. 21) of the first cylindrical member 881B.

  A plurality of projecting members 897 are provided radially around the support column 896. The protruding member 897 extends from the bottom surface of the columnar portion 393 </ b> B to the substantially vertical center of the column portion 896 along the outer peripheral surface of the column portion 896. The protruding member 897 protrudes from the support column 896 in an arc shape in plan view. The diameter of the first press-fit pin 881A including the protruding member 897 is larger than the diameter of the cylindrical hole portion 891 (see FIG. 21).

  At the lower part of the projecting member 897, the projecting width from the support column 896 gradually decreases downward. Thus, when the first press-fit pin 881A is inserted into the cylindrical hole portion 891 (see FIG. 21), the lower portion of the protruding member 897 is suppressed from being caught on the upper surface of the first cylindrical member 881B (see FIG. 21). . The configurations of second to seventh press-fit pins 882A, 883A, 884A, 885A, 886A, and 887A described later are the same as the configurations of the first press-fit pins 881A.

  As shown in FIGS. 18, 19 and 22, the second press-fitting pin is provided on the rear side of the tape driving roller 46 (specifically, an opening 64A described later) and on the left front side of the first upper tape region 400A. 882A is provided. On the opposite side of the second press-fit pin 882A across the plane center of the first upper tape area 400A (more specifically, an opening 65A described later), that is, on the right rear side of the first upper tape area 400A, the fourth A press-fit pin 884A is provided. A third press-fit pin 883A is provided on the back surface of the second upper plane portion 321A, that is, on the left rear side of the first upper tape region 400A.

  In other words, the second to fourth press-fit pins 882A, 883A, and 884A are arranged along the part of the outer edge of the first upper tape region 400A in the upper case 311 and the second to fourth cylindrical members 882B and 883B of the lower case 312 respectively. , 884B (see FIG. 20). The second to fourth press-fit pins 882A, 883A, 884A are provided apart from the upper peripheral wall 303 of the upper case 311.

  A fifth press-fit pin 885A is provided on the back surface of the third upper plane portion 322A, that is, on the right rear side of the second upper tape region 410A. A sixth press-fit pin 886A is provided on the opposite side of the plane center of the second upper tape area 410A (specifically, an upper tape support portion 66A described later), that is, on the left front side of the second upper tape area 410A. Yes. A seventh press-fit pin 887A is provided on the back surface of the upper surface of the third corner portion 323, that is, on the right front side of the first upper ribbon region 420A.

  That is, the fifth and sixth press-fit pins 885A and 886A are arranged along the part of the outer edge of the second upper tape region 410A in the upper case 311, respectively, and the fifth and sixth cylindrical members 885B and 886B (see FIG. 20)). The seventh press-fit pin 887A is provided at a position corresponding to the seventh cylindrical member 887B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312. The fifth to seventh press-fit pins 885A, 886A, 887A are provided apart from the upper peripheral wall 303 of the upper case 311.

  A plate-like body extending downward from the recess 684 is a first connecting arm 871A. The first connection arm 871A is provided at a position corresponding to the first connection hole 871B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312. The first connecting arm 871A extends in the upper right direction from the right end portion of the upper arm front wall 35A in plan view. The first connecting arm 871A has flexibility with respect to an external pressure from an oblique front-rear direction. A claw portion that protrudes obliquely forward to the right is provided at the lower end portion of the first connecting arm 871A. The configurations of second to seventh connection arms 872A, 873A, 874A, 875A, 876A, and 877A described later are the same as the configuration of the first connection arm 871A, but the protruding directions of the claw portions are different.

  A second connecting arm 872A and a third connecting arm 873A are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper head peripheral wall 36A. The second and third connection arms 872A and 873A protrude downward at positions corresponding to the second and third connection holes 872B and 873B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312 respectively. The claw portions of the second and third connecting arms 872A and 873A protrude forward.

  A fourth connection arm 874A and a fifth connection arm 875A are provided on the rear wall included in the upper peripheral wall 303 of the upper case 311. The fourth connecting arm 874A is provided on the left rear side of the first upper tape region 400A. The fifth connecting arm 875A is provided on the rear side of the second upper tape region 410A. The fourth and fifth connection arms 874A and 875A protrude downward at positions corresponding to the fourth and fifth connection holes 874B and 875B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312 respectively. The claw portions of the fourth and fifth connection arms 874A and 875A protrude rearward.

  A sixth connection arm 876A is provided on the rear side of the second press-fit pin 882A and on the left front side of the first upper tape region 400A. The sixth connection arm 876A is provided slightly inside the upper peripheral wall 303 and protrudes downward at a position corresponding to the sixth connection hole 876B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312. A seventh connection arm 877A is provided on the right front side of the second upper tape area 410A and on the right rear side of the first upper ribbon area 420A. The seventh connection arm 877A is provided slightly inside the upper peripheral wall 303 and protrudes downward at a position corresponding to the seventh connection hole 877B (see FIG. 20) of the lower case 312. The claw portion of the sixth connection arm 876A protrudes in the right direction, and the claw portion of the seventh connection arm 877A protrudes in the left direction.

  The joining structure of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 in the tape cassette 30 of this embodiment will be described.

  With reference to FIG. 21, FIG. 23, and FIG. 24, the joining structure of the 1st-7th crimping | compression-bonding parts 881-887 is demonstrated. FIG. 24 illustrates the joining mode of the first cylindrical member 881B and the first press-fit pin 881A, but the second to seventh cylindrical members 882B to 887B and the second to seventh press-fit pins 882A to 887A. The joining mode is also the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23, when the operator assembles the upper case 311 to the lower case 312, first, the column end portion 898 of the first press-fit pin 881A is inserted into the cylindrical hole portion 891 of the first cylindrical member 881B. The As described above, the shaft diameter of the tip end portion (lower end portion) of the column tip end portion 898 is smaller than the diameter of the cylindrical hole portion 891, and the diameter of the cylindrical hole portion 891 is the largest at the upper end portion. For this reason, the support column 896 can be smoothly guided into the cylindrical hole 891.

  When the first press-fit pin 881A is inserted to a predetermined depth of the cylindrical hole portion 891, the protruding member 897 comes into contact with the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical hole portion 891. As described above, the lower end portion of the protruding member 897 has the smallest protrusion width from the column portion 896. Therefore, the protruding member 897 can be smoothly guided into the cylindrical hole portion 891 without being caught on the upper surface of the first cylindrical member 881B.

  The diameter of the first press-fit pin 881A including the protruding member 897 is larger than the diameter of the cylindrical hole portion 891. Therefore, the first press-fit pin 881A is inserted into the cylindrical hole portion 891 while the protruding member 897 is pressurized by the first cylindrical member 881B. As the first press-fit pin 881A is inserted into the cylindrical hole portion 891, the first cylindrical member 881B slightly expands outward due to the repulsive force of the protruding member 897.

  When the first press-fit pin 881A is further inserted into the cylindrical hole portion 891, the upper end surface of the first cylindrical member 881B and the columnar portion 393B of the presser receiving portion 393 come into contact as shown in FIG. Thereby, the 1st cylindrical member 881B and the 1st press-fit pin 881A are connected firmly, and the 1st press-fit part 881 is formed (refer to Drawing 5-Drawing 8).

  Similarly, when the operator assembles the upper case 311 to the lower case 312, the second press-fit pin 882A (see FIG. 22) is inserted into the second cylindrical member 882B (see FIG. 20), and the second crimping portion 882 is formed. Is done. The third press-fit pin 883A (see FIG. 22) is inserted into the third cylindrical member 883B (see FIG. 20), and the third crimping portion 883 is formed. The fourth press-fit pin 884A (see FIG. 22) is inserted into the fourth cylindrical member 884B (see FIG. 20), and the fourth crimping portion 884 is formed.

  The fifth press-fit pin 885A (see FIG. 22) is inserted into the fifth cylindrical member 885B (see FIG. 20), and the fifth crimping portion 885 is formed. The sixth press-fit pin 886A (see FIG. 22) is inserted into the sixth cylindrical member 886B (see FIG. 20), and the sixth crimping portion 886 is formed. The seventh press-fit pin 887A (see FIG. 22) is inserted into the seventh cylindrical member 887B (see FIG. 20), and the seventh crimping portion 887 is formed. The lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are joined by the first to seventh pressure-bonding portions 881 to 887.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, there are four crimping portions (that is, the second crimping portion 882, the third crimping portion 883, and the fourth crimping portion) around the first tape region 400 that accommodates the heaviest tape. A part 884 and a sixth pressure-bonding part 886). The second and fourth crimping portions 882 and 884 are opposed to each other with the substantially planar center of the first tape region 400 interposed therebetween. The third and sixth crimping portions 883 and 886 are opposed to each other with the substantially planar center of the first tape region 400 interposed therebetween. Two crimping portions (that is, a fifth crimping portion 885 and a sixth crimping portion 886) are provided around the second tape region 410 that accommodates the second heaviest tape. The fifth and sixth crimping portions 885 and 886 are opposed to each other with the substantially planar center of the second tape region 410 interposed therebetween.

  Around the second ribbon region 440, two crimping parts (that is, a first crimping part 881 and a sixth crimping part 886) are provided. The first and sixth crimping portions 881 and 886 are opposed to each other with the substantially planar center of the second ribbon region 440 interposed therebetween. Further, in the vicinity of the four corners 321 to 324 in the plan view of the tape cassette 30, there are four crimping parts (that is, the second crimping part 882, the third crimping part 883, the fifth crimping part 885, and the seventh crimping part). 887).

  As described above, the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are firmly joined to each other around the tape and the ink ribbon 60 accommodated in the cassette case 31 and at the four corners of the cassette case 31. For this reason, for example, even when a large physical impact is applied to the cassette case 31 such as when the tape cassette 30 is dropped, the joined state between the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 is easily maintained. That is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a float or a gap between the lower case 312 and the upper case 311.

  Furthermore, the sixth crimping portion 886 fixes the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 around the first tape region 400, the second tape region 410, and the second ribbon region 440 and at the center position of the tape cassette 30. Of the pressure bonding portions that fix the four corners of the tape cassette 30, the fifth pressure bonding portion 885 fixes the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 around the second tape region 410. The second crimping part 882 and the third crimping part 883 fix the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 around the first tape region 400. The seventh crimping portion 887 fixes the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 around the first ribbon region 420. Thus, since the 1st-7th crimping | compression-bonding parts 881-887 each serve also as two or more fixing functions, the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 can be fixed efficiently.

  Conventionally, when the dimensional relationship between the first cylindrical member 881B and the first press-fit pin 881A exceeds an appropriate range, when the first press-fit pin 881A is inserted into the first cylindrical member 881B, the projection member 897 expands it. The first cylindrical member 881B having a diameter may be deformed in appearance or whitened (the same applies to the second to seventh cylindrical members 882B to 887B). Therefore, in the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process, the operator strictly manages the dimensional relationship between the first to seventh cylindrical members 881B to 887B and the first to seventh press-fit pins 881A to 887A.

  In the tape cassette 30 of the present embodiment, all of the first to seventh cylindrical members 881B to 887B are separated from the lower peripheral wall 304. Therefore, even if deformation or whitening occurs in the first to seventh cylindrical members 881B to 887B, the influence thereof hardly affects the appearance of the tape cassette 30. Further, by increasing the pressure for inserting the first to seventh press-fit pins 881A to 887A (for example, increasing the thickness of the first to seventh press-fit pins 881A to 887A), the deterioration of the appearance of the tape cassette 30 is suppressed. The lower case 312 and the upper case 311 can be more reliably fixed. As a result, the burden on the operator who performs the dimension management as described above can be reduced.

  Conventionally, since the cylindrical member provided in the cassette case 31 is in contact with the lower peripheral wall 304, the thickness of the synthetic resin tends to increase at the contact portion between the cylindrical member and the lower peripheral wall 304 inside the case. For this reason, so-called sink marks were likely to occur on the outer surface of the lower peripheral wall 304 during case molding. Therefore, in the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process, a high degree of work accuracy is required so as not to cause sink marks when the case is molded.

  In the tape cassette 30 of the present embodiment, all of the first to seventh cylindrical members 881B to 887B are separated from the lower peripheral wall 304. Therefore, an increase in thickness of the lower peripheral wall 304 is suppressed when the lower case 312 is molded. That is, since the occurrence of sink marks when the lower case 312 is molded is suppressed, deterioration of the appearance of the tape cassette 30 can be suppressed. As a result, the burden on the operator who performs case molding with high work accuracy as described above is reduced.

  With reference to FIGS. 17, 18, and 25 to 27, the joint structure near the arm portion 34 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, when the operator assembles the upper case 311 to the lower case 312, first, the lower portion of the convex portion 689 is inserted into the tip hole portion 687. As described above, the convex portion 689 is narrowed toward the distal end side (lower end side), and the diameter of the distal end hole portion 687 is the largest at the upper end portion. For this reason, the convex part 689 can be smoothly guided into the tip hole part 687.

  When the convex portion 689 is inserted to a predetermined depth in the tip hole portion 687, the claw portion of the first connection arm 871A comes into contact with the back surface of the lower semicircular groove 84B, and the first connection arm 871A is bent slightly rearward. . Further, as the convex portion 689 is inserted into the tip hole portion 687, the claw portion of the first connecting arm 871A moves downward along the back surface of the lower semicircular groove 84B. When the claw portion of the first connecting arm 871A reaches the position of the first connecting hole 871B, it is fitted into the first connecting hole 871B by the elastic force of the first connecting arm 871A.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 25, the 1st connection part 871 is formed. The lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are fixed by the first connecting portion 871 in the vicinity of the end of the arm portion 34 on the upstream side in the tape transport direction. At the same time, the upper contact / separation part 86A and the lower contact / separation part 86B come into contact with each other to form the contact / separation part 86. Since the shaft diameter of the convex portion 689 is smaller than the diameter of the tip hole portion 687, the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are not fixed at the arm tip portion 85. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, the convex portion 689 inserted into the tip hole portion 687 can move in the direction of separating from the tip hole portion 687 according to the external pressure (that is, upward). That is, in the contact / separation part 86, the upper contact / separation part 86A and the lower contact / separation part 86B can be contacted / separated.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the upper end portion 330 of the separation wall 33 is fitted into the fixing groove 331 of the upper case 311, and the separation wall 33 is fixed inside the arm portion 34. Inside the arm portion 34, each restricting portion (that is, the first tape lower restricting portion 381B, 382B, the separation wall restricting portion 383, the first ribbon lower restricting portion 387B, the first tape upper restricting portion 381A, 382A, and the first tape restricting portion 381A). The width direction position between the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is regulated by the ribbon upper regulating portion 387A). The first print surface side restricting portion 389 restricts the movement of the tape to the print surface side.

  Of the restricting portions of the arm portion 34, the restricting portions (the first tape lower restricting portion 381B, the separation wall restricting portion 383, and the first print surface side restricting portion 389) that restrict the tape in the vicinity of the discharge port 341 are all used. A lower case 312 is provided. Therefore, regardless of the joining state of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312, the movement of the tape in the width direction and the printing surface side can be appropriately restricted at the stage immediately before printing. Furthermore, the center position in the vertical direction of the print range of the thermal head 10 and the center position in the width direction of the tape can be made to coincide with each other with high accuracy.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, first tape upper restricting portions 381 </ b> A and 382 </ b> A and first tape lower restricting portions 381 </ b> B and 382 </ b> B are provided in the tape transport path in the arm portion 34. Therefore, the width direction position of the tape transported in the arm portion 34 is regulated on the upstream side and the downstream side in the transport direction (that is, two plane positions).

  On the other hand, a first ribbon upper restricting portion 387A and a first ribbon lower restricting portion 387B are provided in the transport path of the ink ribbon 60 in the arm portion 34. Therefore, the position of the ink ribbon 60 transported in the arm portion 34 is restricted in the width direction only on the upstream side in the transport direction (that is, one planar position). That is, in the vicinity of the discharge port 341 of the arm portion 34, the position in the width direction of the tape is regulated, but the position in the width direction of the ink ribbon 60 is not regulated.

  Since the ink ribbon 60 is thinner than the tape, wrinkles are likely to occur if the width direction is excessively restricted. In the present embodiment, the ink ribbon 60 is restricted in the width direction on the upstream side in the arm portion 34, but is not restricted in the width direction on the downstream side in the arm portion 34. That is, the ink ribbon 60 is allowed to swing in the width direction in the vicinity of the discharge port 341 while being restricted in the width direction in the arm portion 34. Therefore, the position in the width direction of the ink ribbon 60 can be ensured within an appropriate range, and wrinkles can be prevented from occurring in the ink ribbon 60.

  For example, when the tape cassette 30 falls, an external force may be applied to the arm portion 34 in the vertical direction as a physical impact is applied to the cassette case 31. In this case, as shown in FIG. 26, the upper contact / separation part 86A and the lower contact / separation part 86B which constitute the contact / separation part 86 are separated. Thereafter, the upper contact / separation part 86A and the lower contact / separation part 86B come into contact again by the elastic force of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 joined by the first connecting part 871 (see FIG. 25). That is, even when an external force in the vertical direction is applied to the arm portion 34, the arm tip portion 85 returns to a normal state.

  When the arm distal end portion 85 returns to the normal state, the position in the width direction between the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the arm portion 34 is appropriately regulated again by each regulating portion. For this reason, even when a physical impact is applied to the cassette case 31, the tape and the ink ribbon 60 are appropriately conveyed, and the print quality is kept good. As described above, the external pressure can be buffered by the upper contact / separation portion 86A being instantaneously separated from the lower contact / separation portion 86B according to the external pressure. As a result, the physical durability performance of the arm part 34 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first connecting portion 871 is provided in the semicircular groove 84. Since the semicircular groove 84 is a substantially semicircular curved surface portion in plan view, the semicircular groove 84 has a higher strength against bending than the flat arm front wall 35. For this reason, even when a physical impact is applied to the cassette case 31, the connection between the first connection arm 871A and the first connection hole 871B is difficult to be released. Therefore, for example, even when the tape cassette 30 falls, the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 can be reliably fixed by the first connecting portion 871.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the upper tip 85A is guided toward the lower tip 85B while the convex portion 689 is inserted into the tip hole 687. . This prevents the upper tip 85A or the lower tip 85B from coming into contact with the tape or the ink ribbon 60 in the arm 34. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the print quality due to the scratches on the tape or the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 19, 20, 22, and 32, the lower arm back wall 37 </ b> B of the lower case 312 is provided with a notch 372 that is notched in a V shape downward. A part of the separation wall 33 is exposed to the rear of the lower arm rear wall 37 </ b> B through the notch 372. On the upper arm rear wall 37 </ b> A of the upper case 311, a protrusion 371 </ b> A that protrudes downward in a V shape is provided corresponding to the notch 372.

  When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the protrusion 371 </ b> A is fitted into the notch 372 without a gap. Thereby, the upper arm rear wall 37A and the lower arm rear wall 37B are joined to form the arm rear wall 37 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the upper end of the lower arm back wall 37B and the lower end of the upper arm back wall 37A are respectively linear, the joined state of the arm back wall 37 can be strengthened.

  Conventionally, when the interval between the separation wall 33 and the lower arm back wall 37B in the lower case 312 is narrow and the lower arm back wall 37B is a wall portion having the same height as the separation wall 33, the gold There was a risk of molding problems. In other words, in order to mold two wall portions of the same height that are arranged at a narrow interval, a mold that fits between both wall portions is required. However, since such a mold is thin, the strength is high. Was weak. Therefore, in the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process, for example, a countermeasure such as mold maintenance is required.

  In the present embodiment, the lower arm rear wall 37B is provided with a notch 372 that exposes the separation wall 33 in the rear view. Therefore, a mold that fits in the head insertion portion 39 (see FIG. 17) and a mold that fits between the lower arm back wall 37B and the separation wall 33 are interposed via a mold portion that fits in the notch 372. It can be manufactured integrally and the mold strength can be improved. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the operator who performs the countermeasure such as the maintenance of the mold as described above.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the arm back wall 37 is a wall portion extending in the left-right direction as a whole. A refracting portion 373 is provided slightly on the right side of the left end portion of the arm back wall 37. The arm back wall 37 is slightly refracted rearward by the refracting portion 373. In other words, the arm back wall 37 slightly swells toward the head insertion portion 39 on the downstream side in the tape transport direction in the arm portion 34.

  In the vicinity of the refracting portion 373, the distance between the arm back wall 37 and the separation wall 33 (that is, the length in the front-rear direction) is slightly increased (see FIG. 20). Thereby, since the conveyance path | route of the ink ribbon 60 in the arm part 34 can be ensured wide, the running performance of the ink ribbon 60 improves. Further, for example, the physical strength of the arm portion 34 can be improved as compared with a case where the arm back wall 37 is linear in a plan view.

  A wall portion extending leftward and forward from the refracting portion 373 in the arm back wall 37 is a front end side back wall 374. In other words, the front end side back wall 374 is a portion of the arm back wall 37 adjacent to the discharge port 341. Since the front-side back wall 374 is inclined left front in plan view, the length in the front-rear direction of the head insertion portion 39 is increased in the vicinity of the discharge port 341. Therefore, when attaching / detaching the head holder 74 to / from the head insertion portion 39, the possibility that the tip side of the arm portion 34 contacts the thermal head 10 can be reduced.

  With reference to FIG. 15, the joining structure of the 2nd-7th connection parts 872-877 is demonstrated. When the operator assembles the upper case 311 to the lower case 312, the claw portion of the second connecting arm 872A (see FIG. 22) is fitted into the second connecting hole 872B (see FIG. 20), like the first connecting portion 871. A second connecting portion 872 is formed. The claw portion of the third connection arm 873A (see FIG. 22) is fitted into the third connection hole 873B (see FIG. 20), and the third connection portion 873 is formed. The claw portion of the fourth connection arm 874A (see FIG. 22) is fitted into the fourth connection hole 874B (see FIG. 20), and the fourth connection portion 874 is formed.

  The claw portion of the fifth connection arm 875A (see FIG. 22) is fitted into the fifth connection hole 875B (see FIG. 20) to form the fifth connection portion 875. The claw portion of the sixth connection arm 876A (see FIG. 22) is fitted into the sixth connection hole 876B (see FIG. 20) to form the sixth connection portion 876. The claw portion of the seventh connection arm 877A (see FIG. 22) is fitted into the seventh connection hole 877B (see FIG. 20) to form the seventh connection portion 877. The lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are joined by the first to seventh connecting portions 871 to 877.

  Specifically, the first connecting portion 871 fixes the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 on the front surface of the tape cassette 30. The second connecting portion 872 and the third connecting portion 873 fix the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 in the vicinity of the front surface of the tape cassette 30. The fourth connecting portion 874 and the fifth connecting portion 875 fix the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 on the back surface of the tape cassette 30. The sixth connecting portion 876 fixes the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 in the vicinity of the left surface of the tape cassette 30. The seventh connecting portion 877 fixes the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 in the vicinity of the right surface of the tape cassette 30. That is, the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are securely connected to each side surface of the tape cassette 30 (the outer surface formed by the upper peripheral wall 303 and the lower peripheral wall 304 shown in FIG. 18) by the first to seventh connecting portions 871 to 877. Can be fixed.

  The second connecting portion 872 and the third connecting portion 873 fix the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 in the vicinity of the head peripheral wall 36 (see FIG. 30). The second connecting portion 872 is provided in the vicinity of the tape drive roller 46 (see FIG. 5). The third connecting portion 873 is provided in the vicinity of the ribbon take-up spool 44 (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the second and third connecting portions 872 and 873 suppress vibrations that occur when the tape drive roller 46 and the ribbon take-up spool 44 are rotationally driven. Therefore, the running of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be stabilized, and as a result, the printing quality can be improved.

  In the first tape area 400, the first tape spool 40 around which the heaviest tape is wound is stored. For example, when the tape cassette 30 is dropped, the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are easily separated in the vicinity of the first tape region 400 due to the weight of the tape wound around the first tape spool 40. In the present embodiment, the second, fourth, and sixth connecting portions 872, 874, and 876 are provided in the vicinity of the first tape region 400. Therefore, even when a physical impact is applied to the cassette case 31, it is possible to suppress the cassette case 31 from being opened in the vicinity of the first tape region 400, thereby improving the physical strength of the cassette case 31.

  As described above, when the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the lower portion of the convex portion 689 is in the tip hole portion 687 before the claw portion of the first connecting arm 871A contacts the lower semicircular groove 84B. Inserted into. Therefore, the claw portion of the first connection arm 871A can be accurately fitted into the first connection hole 871B in a state where the convex portion 689 is guided in the tip hole portion 687.

  Further, in the upper case 311 of this embodiment, the first to seventh press-fit pins 881A to 887A all extend below the first to seventh connection arms 871A to 877A (see FIGS. 18 and 19). . Therefore, when the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the claw portions of the first to seventh connection arms 871 </ b> A to 877 </ b> A contact the lower peripheral wall 304 of the lower case 312 before the first to seventh The press-fit pins 881A to 887A are inserted into the first to seventh cylindrical members 881B to 887B, respectively.

  Therefore, with the first to seventh press-fit pins 881A to 887A guided in the first to seventh cylindrical members 881B to 887B, respectively, the claw portions of the first to seventh connection arms 871A to 877A are respectively The first to seventh connection holes 871B to 877B can be accurately fitted. That is, when the operator assembles the upper case 311 to the lower case 312, the upper case 311 can be assembled accurately without tilting.

  As shown in FIG. 20, guide ribs 809 extending upward to the upper end of the lower peripheral wall 304 are provided on the left and right edges of the second to fifth connection holes 872B to 875B, respectively. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the second to fifth connection arms 872 </ b> A to 875 </ b> A are restricted from moving in the left-right direction by the guide ribs 809, respectively, Guided towards 875B.

  Similarly, guide ribs 809 extending upward to the upper ends of the left inner wall 861 and the right inner wall 862 are provided at both front and rear edges of the sixth and seventh connection holes 876B and 877B, respectively. The sixth and seventh connection arms 876A and 877A are also guided toward the sixth and seventh connection holes 876B and 877B while the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guide rib 809, respectively. Therefore, the operator can assemble the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 more accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 15, since the third connecting portion 873 is provided on the right portion of the head peripheral wall 36, the third connecting portion 873 is positioned behind the arm back wall 37 in a front view. The entry of a finger or a foreign object into the head insertion portion 39 is hindered by the arm back wall 37. Therefore, the claw portion of the third connection arm 873A fitted in the third connection hole 873B is difficult to be directly pressed from the outside.

  Furthermore, in a state where the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are joined, the sixth connecting portion 876 and the seventh connecting portion 877 are provided inside the cassette case 31. Therefore, the claw portions of the sixth and seventh connection arms 876A and 877A fitted in the sixth and seventh connection holes 876B and 877B are not easily pressed directly from the outside. Therefore, the possibility that the connected state of the third, sixth, and seventh connecting portions 873, 876, and 877 can be released, for example, when the claw portion is pressed from the outside can be reduced.

  With reference to FIGS. 5 to 8, 15, 16, 20, and 22, the relationship between the joining structure of the tape cassette 30 and the reference surface will be described. The first crimping portion 881 is provided between two reference surfaces (a first upper plane portion 393A and a first lower plane portion 391B) facing each other in the vertical direction at the upstream end portion of the head insertion portion 39. The first upper plane portion 393A and the first lower plane portion 391B are held at appropriate height positions by the first crimping portion 881.

  That is, each restricting portion (specifically, the first tape lower restricting portion 381B, 382B, the separation wall restricting portion 383, provided near one of the first upper flat portion 393A and the first lower flat portion 391B). The height positions of the first ribbon lower restricting portion 387B, the third ribbon lower restricting portion 421B, the first tape upper restricting portions 381A and 382A, and the first ribbon upper restricting portion 387A) are appropriately held. For this reason, the conveyance precision of a tape and the ink ribbon 60, and by extension, the printing precision of the thermal head 10 can be improved.

  The second connecting portion 872 is provided above the second lower flat portion 392B provided in the second receiving portion 392 in the vertical direction. The second lower flat surface portion 392B is held at an appropriate height position by the second connecting portion 872. That is, each restricting portion (specifically, the second tape lower restricting portion 363B, the second tape upper restricting portion 363A, the separating wall restricting portion 364, the second ribbon lower portion) provided in the vicinity of the second lower flat portion 392B. The height positions of the restricting portion 388B and the second ribbon upper restricting portion 388A) are appropriately maintained. For this reason, the conveyance precision of a tape and the ink ribbon 60, and by extension, the printing precision of the thermal head 10 can be improved.

  The third crimping portion 883 is provided between two reference surfaces (second upper plane portion 321 </ b> A and third lower plane portion 321 </ b> B) that face each other in the vertical direction at the first corner portion 321. The second upper plane portion 321A and the third lower plane portion 321B are held at appropriate height positions by the third crimping portion 883. In other words, each restricting portion (specifically, the third tape lower restricting portion 401B and the third tape upper restricting portion 401A) provided in the vicinity of one of the third lower flat portion 321B and the second upper flat portion 321A. The height position is properly maintained. For this reason, it is possible to improve the tape transport accuracy and, consequently, the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10.

  The fifth crimping portion 885 is provided between the two reference surfaces (the third upper plane portion 322A and the fourth lower plane portion 322B) facing each other in the vertical direction at the second corner portion 322. The third upper plane portion 322A and the fourth lower plane portion 322B are held at appropriate height positions by the fifth crimping portion 885. In other words, the restricting portions (specifically, the fourth tape lower restricting portion 411B and the fourth tape upper restricting portion 411A) provided in the vicinity of either the third upper flat portion 322A or the fourth lower flat portion 322B. The height position is properly maintained. For this reason, it is possible to improve the tape transport accuracy and, consequently, the printing accuracy of the thermal head 10.

  Here, when the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are assembled, the operator first supports the lower case 312 with a jig. At this time, the operator places the first to fourth lower flat portions 391B, 392B, 321B, and 322B, which are reference surfaces, on the placement surface of the jig. The operator assembles the upper case 311 from the upper side with respect to the lower case 312 supported by the jig. Thereby, the 1st-7th crimping | compression-bonding part 881-887 and the 1st-7th connection part 871-877 are formed as mentioned above, and the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are joined. It is preferable that the height position of the mounting surface of the jig accurately corresponds to the height positions of the first to fourth lower plane portions 391B, 392B, 321B, and 322B.

  In the present embodiment, the first to fourth lower flat portions 391B, 392B, 321B, and 322B are set at the same height position in the lower case 312. Correspondingly, the mounting surface of the jig is also set at the same height position. When creating the mounting surface of the jig, it can be created more accurately and easily when it is created at the same height position than when it is created at different height positions. Therefore, the height position of the mounting surface of the jig can be made to correspond exactly to the height positions of the first to fourth lower flat portions 391B, 392B, 321B, and 322B.

  With reference to FIG. 15, FIG. 18, FIG. 19 and FIG. 28 to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18, 19, and 28, when the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the upper end of the isolation wall 43 fits into the fixing groove 332 and the protrusion 398 fits into the fixing hole 399. The upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are fixed. As a result, a separation unit 61 is formed on the upstream side of the tape drive roller 46 to separate the tape and the ink ribbon 60 used for printing at the exposure unit 77.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the printed tape and the ink ribbon 60 enter the separation unit 61 in an overlapped state, and branch via an introduction port 61 </ b> A that is a common conveyance path. It is conveyed to the mouth 790. The branch port 790 is a part where the introduction port 61A, the tape guide port 61B, and the ribbon guide port 61C are connected. At the branch port 790, the used ink ribbon 60 is separated from the printed tape that has entered the separation unit 61. The separated ink ribbon 60 enters the ribbon guide port 61 </ b> C and is guided toward the second ribbon region 440. The tape from which the ink ribbon 60 has been separated enters the tape guide port 61B and is guided toward the front of the tape drive roller 46.

  The branch port 790 of the present embodiment is one transport path in which the entrance of the tape guide port 61B and the entrance of the ribbon guide port 61C are arranged in the left-right direction. However, as described above, the second tape upper restricting portion 363A and the second tape lower restricting portion 363B are provided on the upper and lower sides of the tape guide port 61B, respectively. Therefore, in the branch port 790, the vertical length of the tape guide port 61B is slightly smaller than the vertical length of the ribbon guide port 61C.

  As described above, in the vicinity of the discharge port 341 of the arm portion 34, the position in the width direction of the tape is regulated, while the position in the width direction of the ink ribbon 60 is not regulated. Therefore, the tape discharged from the arm portion 34 is easily printed by the thermal head 10 and then enters the separation portion 61 while maintaining an appropriate position in the width direction. In this case, the position in the width direction of the tape transported to the branch port 790 substantially coincides with the vertical position defined by the second tape upper restricting portion 363A and the second tape lower restricting portion 363B. Therefore, the printed tape is not affected by the step formed between the introduction port 61A and the tape guide port 61B (that is, the second tape upper restriction portion 363A and the second tape lower restriction portion 363B), The tape guide roller 61B enters the tape guide port 61B along the pulling direction of the tape drive roller 46.

  On the other hand, the ink ribbon 60 discharged from the arm part 34 is used for printing by the thermal head 10 and then easily enters the separation part 61 in a state of being slightly deviated from the proper width direction position. In this case, the position in the width direction of the ink ribbon 60 conveyed to the branch port 790 is deviated from the vertical position defined by the second tape upper restriction portion 363A and the second tape lower restriction portion 363B. Therefore, the used ink ribbon 60 is likely to be interfered by a step formed between the introduction port 61A and the tape guide port 61B.

  In particular, the ink ribbon 60 tends to shift slightly from the proper position in the width direction due to its own weight in the process from the discharge port 341 to the separation unit 61. Therefore, the ink ribbon 60 conveyed to the branch port 790 is likely to come into contact with a lower step (that is, the second tape lower restriction portion 363B) formed between the introduction port 61A and the tape guide port 61B. Therefore, the ink ribbon 60 does not enter the tape guide port 61B, but enters the ribbon guide port 61C having a length in the vertical direction larger than the tape guide port 61B along the winding direction of the ribbon take-up spool 44.

  In the process from the discharge port 341 to the separation unit 61, the ink ribbon 60 may be slightly shifted upward from the proper width direction position due to, for example, vibration caused by a printing operation. In this case, the ink ribbon 60 transported to the branch port 790 contacts the upper step formed between the introduction port 61A and the tape guide port 61B (that is, the second tape upper regulating portion 363A). In the same manner, the ribbon guide port 61C is entered.

  As described above, the ink ribbon 60 is guided from the introduction port 61A to the ribbon guide port 61C by using the fact that the ink ribbon 60 discharged from the arm portion 34 is allowed to move in the width direction at the branch port 790. Is done. Accordingly, even when the vertical length (width) of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is the same, the ink ribbon 60 is erroneously entered into the tape guide port 61B by being dragged by the tape overlapping the ink ribbon 60. This can be suppressed. Even when the width of the tape is smaller than the width of the ink ribbon 60, the ink ribbon 60 can be prevented from erroneously entering the tape guide port 61B as described above.

  Between the introduction port 61A and the tape guide port 61B, there are provided two steps (that is, a second tape upper restricting portion 363A and a second tape lower restricting portion 363B) facing each other in the vertical direction. The center position in the vertical direction of the introduction port 61A and the center position in the vertical direction of the tape guide port 61B are substantially the same as the center position in the width direction of the tape. Therefore, even if the ink ribbon 60 is shifted from the proper position in the width direction either upward or downward, the ink ribbon 60 can be properly separated from the tape and can be guided to the ribbon guide port 61C.

  Further, the tape that has passed through the introduction port 61A is conveyed downstream while the movement in the width direction is restricted by the tape guide port 61B. On the other hand, the ink ribbon 60 having passed through the introduction port 61A is conveyed downstream while allowing movement in the width direction at the ribbon guide port 61C. When the ink ribbon 60 moves in the width direction in the ribbon guide port 61C, the ink ribbon 60 conveyed at the introduction port 61A easily moves in the width direction. As a result, the ink ribbon 60 moved in the width direction at the introduction port 61A comes into contact with the step provided at the end portion of the introduction port 61A (that is, the second tape upper restriction portion 363A and the second tape lower restriction portion 363B). This facilitates separation from the tape.

  As described above, the ink ribbon 60 is prevented from entering the tape guide port 61B due to the level difference, and is separated from the tape entering the tape guide port 61B. The ink ribbon 60 that has come into contact with the step enters the ribbon guide port 61C that is longer in the vertical direction than the tape guide port 61B. Therefore, in the separation part 61, the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be reliably separated, and the ink ribbon 60 can be prevented from entering the tape guide port 61B. Since the ink ribbon 60 separated from the tape enters the ribbon guide port 61C, the ink ribbon 60 can be conveyed along an appropriate path.

  As described above, the movement of the tape passing through the tape guide port 61B in the width direction is restricted by the second tape lower restriction portion 363B, the second tape upper restriction portion 363A, and the isolation wall restriction portion 364. The tape passing through the tape guide port 61B is restricted from moving to the print surface side by the second print surface side restricting portions 43A and 43B, and is bent slightly rearward to give back tension. However, the tape transport path from the discharge port 341 to the front of the tape drive roller 46 via the separation unit 61 is a straight line extending substantially in the left direction in plan view. Therefore, the tape discharged from the discharge port 341 can be smoothly conveyed to the front of the tape drive roller 46.

  Of the restricting portions of the separating portion 61, restricting portions that restrict the tape in the vicinity of the tape driving roller 46 (specifically, the second tape lower restricting portion 363B, the separating wall restricting portion 364, the second print surface side restricting portion) 43A, 43B) are provided in the lower case 312. Therefore, regardless of the joining state of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312, the movement of the tape in the width direction and the print surface side via the tape guide port 61 </ b> B can be appropriately restricted. Further, since the second printing surface side restricting portions 43A and 43B are provided only at the upper and lower ends of the front end surface of the separating wall 43, the area in contact with the printing portion of the tape can be minimized, and the printing can be performed. The possibility of impairing quality can be reduced.

  As described above, the ink ribbon 60 passing through the ribbon guide port 61 </ b> C is guided toward the second ribbon region 440 and is taken up by the ribbon take-up spool 44. The ink ribbon 60 passing through the ribbon guide port 61C is transported in the right rear direction separated from the tape passing through the tape guide port 61B, and further transported in the right direction which is substantially opposite to the tape transport direction. Therefore, the transport path of the ink ribbon 60 from the discharge port 341 to the ribbon take-up spool 44 via the separation unit 61 is bent at an acute angle at the separation unit 61 in plan view. Thereby, in the separation part 61, the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be reliably separated. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the running of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 by suppressing the tape and the ink ribbon 60 from being dragged by each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the vertical lengths of the separation wall 33 and the separation wall 43 substantially coincide with the vertical length of the cassette case 31. Therefore, when the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, as described above, the separation wall 33 and the separation wall 43 are fitted in the fixing grooves 331 and 332, respectively. Thereby, the operator can easily confirm by visually observing the fixing grooves 331 and 332 whether or not the separation wall 33 and the separation wall 43 are properly connected to the upper case 311.

  For example, when the tape cassette 30 is dropped, even if the separation wall 33 and the separation wall 43 are momentarily detached from the fixing grooves 331 and 332 due to a physical impact applied to the cassette case 31, they are automatically restored. Return to the state. That is, the separation wall 33 and the separation wall 43 are easily fitted in the fixing grooves 331 and 332, respectively, and thus return as they are. Moreover, since the separation wall 33 and the isolation wall 43 are respectively fitted in the fixing grooves 331 and 332 that are grooves for the respective shapes in a plan view, the separation wall 33 and the isolation wall 43 can be stably fixed as compared with a case where they are connected by pins and holes, for example.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, the first to third corners 321 to 323 of the upper case 311 are provided with corner protrusions 631 that protrude downward from the upper plate 305 along the respective contour shapes. ing. When the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, the three corner protrusions 631 provided on the upper case 311 are fitted along the first to third corner portions 321 to 323 of the lower case 312, respectively. That is, inside the cassette case 31, each corner projection 631 contacts the inner wall of the corner of the lower peripheral wall 304 that forms the outline of the first to third corners 321 to 323 without any gap.

  As a result, the first to third corner portions 321 to 323 are reinforced by the corner protrusions 631 inside the cassette case 31, respectively. That is, the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are firmly joined by the first to third corner portions 321 to 323. The first to third corner portions 321 to 323 are portions having high structural rigidity in the box-shaped cassette case 31. Therefore, the physical strength of the cassette case 31 can be increased.

  For example, when the tape cassette 30 is dropped, a strong physical impact is easily applied to any one of the first to third corner portions 321 to 323 in the box-shaped cassette case 31. In the present embodiment, the first to third corners 321 to 323 are reinforced by the corner protrusions 631, respectively. Therefore, even if a strong physical impact is applied to the first to third corner portions 321 to 323, the physical impact is buffered by the corner protrusion 631, so that the cassette case 31 is prevented from being damaged.

  The first corner portion 321 and the third corner portion 323 are positioned diagonally with respect to the cassette case 31 in plan view, and are reinforced by corner projections 631, respectively. Therefore, when a physical impact is applied to one of the first corner portion 321 and the third corner portion 323, the physical impact can be distributed and received at the other corner portion. For example, when a physical impact is applied to the first corner 321, the physical impact is caused by the corner protrusion 631 that reinforces the first corner 321 and the corner protrusion 631 that reinforces the third corner 323. Is buffered.

  As described above, the width T (see FIG. 39) of the common portion 32 is constant regardless of the tape width. That is, the height positions of the upper surfaces of the corner portions 321 to 324 in the upper case 311 and the center position in the width direction of the tape stored in the cassette case 31 are constant regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30. Therefore, even if the width dimensions of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are different, the distance from the corner protrusion 631 to the center position in the width direction of the tape is always constant.

  Therefore, regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30, that is, the width dimensions of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312, the corner protrusions 631 can be provided at a common height position and protruding width. Even if the width dimensions of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are different, the strength design of the cassette case 31 can be made common.

  With reference to FIGS. 15-17 and 29-36, the detail of each part which comprises the tape cassette 30 is demonstrated. In the following, the laminate type tape cassette 30 will be exemplified, and holes provided in the cassette case 31 (roller support holes 64-, first tape support holes 65, second tape support holes 66, ribbon support holes 67, windings) The take-up spool support hole 68 and the guide hole 47) and members related to these holes will be described.

  The roller support hole 64 and the tape drive roller 46 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, 29 and 30. As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 and 29, the tape drive roller 46 is rotatably supported through a roller support hole 64. The roller support hole 64 includes an opening 64A provided in the upper plate 305 and an opening 64B provided in the bottom plate 306. The opening 64 </ b> A and the opening 64 </ b> B are through holes provided at positions corresponding to the vertical direction of the cassette case 31.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the tape drive roller 46 is a cylindrical body having a height substantially equal to the height of the cassette case 31. The outer diameter of the main body 46E of the tape drive roller 46 is larger than the diameters of the openings 64A and 64B. The outer peripheral surface of the main body 46E is a roller surface 46C that comes into contact with the tape. The length of the roller surface 46C in the vertical direction (that is, the tape feed width) is the same as the tape width.

  The upper end portion 46A of the tape drive roller 46 is a cylindrical portion that protrudes upward from the center of the upper end surface of the main body portion 46E. The lower end portion 46B of the tape drive roller 46 is a cylindrical portion that protrudes downward from the center of the lower end surface of the main body portion 46E. The outer diameters of the upper end portion 46A and the lower end portion 46B are slightly smaller than the diameters of the openings 64A and 64B, respectively. Inside the tape drive roller 46, a shaft hole 46D penetrating in the vertical direction through the main body 46E, the upper end 46A and the lower end 46B is provided.

  Inside the cassette case 31, the upper end portion 46 </ b> A is fitted into the opening portion 64 </ b> A of the upper plate 305, and the lower end portion 46 </ b> B is fitted into the opening portion 64 </ b> B of the bottom plate 306. Specifically, the upper end portion of the main body portion 46E is in contact with a support body that protrudes downward from the upper plate 305 along the opening edge of the opening portion 64A. The lower end of the main body 46E is in contact with a support that protrudes upward from the bottom plate 306 along the opening edge of the opening 64B. As a result, the tape drive roller 46 is rotatably supported by the upper end portion 46A and the lower end portion 46B while the vertical movement is restricted by the main body portion 46E.

  A plurality of ribs 46F extending upward from the lower end portion are provided on the inner peripheral surface of the tape driving roller 46 (that is, the inner wall forming the shaft hole 46D). When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the tape drive shaft 100 (see FIG. 45) is inserted into the shaft hole 46D through the opening 64B. Within the shaft hole 46D, the plurality of cam members 100A (see FIG. 45) mesh with the plurality of ribs 46F. The diameter of the shaft hole 46D is slightly larger than the shaft diameter of the tape drive shaft 100. Therefore, the tape drive shaft 100 inserted into the shaft hole 46D has a little play in the circumferential direction.

  Conventionally, when the lower case 312 is molded, a recess (so-called meat stealing portion) for reducing the thickness in the vicinity of the opening 64B is formed on the inner side of the lower case 312 (that is, the upper surface side of the bottom plate 306). there were. In this case, when the operator attaches the tape driving roller 46 to the opening 64B of the lower case 312, the lower end 46B of the tape driving roller 46 is caught by the meat stealing part near the opening 64B, and the rotation of the tape driving roller 46 is poor. There was a risk of causing. Therefore, in the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process, it is necessary for the operator to pay attention not to hook the tape drive roller 46 on the meat burglar.

  In the present embodiment, when the lower case 312 is molded, a meat stealing portion 990 that reduces the thickness in the vicinity of the opening 64B is formed outside the lower case 312 (that is, the lower surface side of the bottom plate 306) (see FIG. 16). . Thereby, the vicinity of the opening 64B inside the lower case 312 can be flattened, and rotation failure of the tape drive roller 46 due to the meat stealing portion can be suppressed. As a result, the burden on the worker who pays attention to the meat robber as described above can be reduced.

  The first tape support hole 65 and the first tape spool 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, 29 and 31. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 29, the first tape spool 40 housed in the first tape region 400 is rotatably supported through the first tape support hole 65.

  As shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 31, the first tape support hole 65 includes an opening 65 </ b> A provided in the upper plate 305, an opening 65 </ b> B provided in the bottom plate 306, and the openings 65 </ b> A and 65 </ b> B. And a shaft hole 65C communicating with each other. The opening 65 </ b> A and the opening 65 </ b> B are through holes provided at positions corresponding to the vertical direction of the cassette case 31.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the upper case 311 includes a plurality of locking ribs 784 extending downward from the opening 65A. Each of the locking ribs 784 is a hook-like body that protrudes in a direction in which the front end sides thereof face each other inside the cassette case 31. The lower case 312 includes a cylindrical tube wall portion 785 extending upward from the opening 65B.

  The cylindrical wall portion 785 is provided with a plurality of slits 787 cut in the vertical direction. The upper open end of each slit 787 is closed by a head 786. Inside the cassette case 31, locking ribs 784 fitted in the slits 787 are respectively locked to the head 786. A shaft hole 65 </ b> C penetrating in the vertical direction is provided inside the cylindrical wall portion 785. The openings 65A and 65B communicate with each other through a shaft hole 65C.

  The first tape spool 40 has a double wall structure of an inner wall 40A and an outer wall 40B. The inner wall 40A is a cylindrical body whose inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical wall portion 785, and has a height smaller than the tape width. A shaft hole 40D penetrating in the vertical direction is provided inside the inner wall 40A. The outer wall 40B is a cylindrical body that surrounds the inner wall 40A over the entire circumference, and has a height substantially equal to the tape width. A double-sided adhesive tape 58 is wound around the outer peripheral surface of the outer wall 40B. In the receptor type tape cassette 30, the printing tape 57 is wound around the outer wall 40B (see FIG. 7). In the thermal type tape cassette 30, the thermal paper tape 55 is wound around the outer wall 40B (see FIG. 8).

  The first tape spool 40 has a plurality of coupling bodies 40C that are laid between the inner wall 40A and the outer wall 40B. The first tape spool 40 is configured in a double cylinder shape in which the inner wall 40A and the outer wall 40B are coaxial with each other by a plurality of coupling bodies 40C. The first tape spool 40 is rotatably supported by a cylindrical wall portion 785 inserted into the shaft hole 40D. The diameter of the shaft hole 65 </ b> C is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the shaft diameter of the auxiliary shaft 110.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, spacers 980 made of PET (polyethylene terephthalate resin film) are provided on both end surfaces in the width direction of the double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40. The spacer 980 is a disc body having a diameter equal to or larger than the winding diameter of the double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40 with the largest winding diameter. The spacer 980 of this embodiment has substantially the same diameter as the first tape region 400 and has a diameter slightly larger than the maximum winding diameter of the double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 58.

  The spacer 980 prevents the adhesive from oozing out from the double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40. Thereby, for example, the first tape spool 40 and the upper plate 305 and the bottom plate 306 can be prevented from being bonded by the adhesive that has oozed out from the double-sided adhesive tape 58. As a result, it can suppress that the smooth rotation of the 1st tape spool 40 is prevented.

  The second tape support hole 66 and the second tape spool 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, 29, and 32 to 34. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 29, the second tape spool 41 accommodated in the second tape region 410 is rotatably supported through the second tape support hole 66.

  As shown in FIGS. 15, 16 and 32, the second tape spool 41 is a cylindrical body having a height substantially the same as the tape width. A film tape 59 is wound around the outer peripheral surface of the second tape spool 41. The second tape support hole 66 includes an upper tape support portion 66 </ b> A provided on the lower surface side of the upper plate 305 and a lower tape support portion 66 </ b> B provided on the upper surface side of the bottom plate 306. 66 A of upper tape support parts and the lower tape support part 66B are provided in the position corresponding to the up-down direction of the cassette case 31, and are mutually connected.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the upper tape support portion 66 </ b> A includes an upper base portion 581 and a cylindrical portion 582. The upper base 581 is a cylindrical body that protrudes downward from the upper plate 305 and has a lower end surface. The upper base portion 581 is inserted into the shaft hole 41A of the second tape spool 41 from above. The cylindrical portion 582 is a small-diameter cylindrical body that protrudes downward from the center of the lower end surface of the upper base portion 581, and has a shaft hole that penetrates in the vertical direction.

  The lower tape support portion 66B includes a lower base portion 583, a support shaft 584, a plurality of locking protrusions 585, a plurality of locking grooves 586, and a diameter expansion prevention body 587 (see FIG. 34). The lower base 583 is a cylindrical body that protrudes upward from the bottom plate 306 and has an upper end surface. The lower base 583 is inserted into the shaft hole 41A of the second tape spool 41 from below. The support shaft 584 is a small-diameter shaft body provided upright at the center of the upper end surface of the lower base portion 583, and the upper end portion is fitted into the shaft hole of the cylindrical portion 582. The plurality of locking projections 585 are a plurality of prisms arranged radially around the support shaft 584 in plan view along the periphery of the upper end surface of the lower base portion 583. The plurality of locking grooves 586 are a plurality of groove portions respectively formed between the adjacent locking protrusions 585. The diameter expansion prevention body 587 will be described later separately.

  The rotating member 571 includes a cylindrical protrusion 571A, a pair of protrusions 571B, and a main body 571C. The main body 571C is a cylindrical body having substantially the same diameter as the shaft hole 41A. The pair of protrusions 571B are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571C, and protrude radially outward at positions facing each other. The cylindrical protrusion 571A is a cylindrical body that projects from one end side of the main body 571C and has a smaller diameter than the main body 571C. A clutch spring 572 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical protrusion 571A.

  The clutch spring 572 is a coil spring including an annular portion 572A and a locking portion 572B. The annular portion 572A is a coil attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical protrusion 571A. The locking portion 572B is a tip portion of the coil extending outward from the rear end (lower end in FIG. 32) of the annular portion 572A. The annular portion 572A is wound in the clockwise direction from the front end (upper end in FIG. 32) to the rear end (that is, the locking portion 572B) of the annular portion 572A. The clutch spring 572 is wound so as to have a slightly smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 571A.

  The cylindrical protrusion 571A is inserted into the annular portion 572A having a slightly enlarged diameter so as to penetrate from the front end side to the rear end side of the annular portion 572A. Thereby, the annular portion 572A is brought into close contact with the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical projection 571A by its elastic force, and the locking portion 572B is disposed on the distal end side of the cylindrical projection 571A. The winding direction of the annular portion 572A (that is, the clockwise direction from the front end to the rear end of the annular portion 572A) coincides with the drawing direction of the film tape 59 in plan view.

  The rotating member 571 to which the clutch spring 572 is mounted is mounted in the shaft hole 41A of the second tape spool 41 so that the cylindrical protrusion 571A faces the lower tape support portion 66B. A pair of sliding grooves 41B extending in the vertical direction are provided at positions facing each other on the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole 41A. In the shaft hole 41 </ b> A, each protrusion 571 </ b> B of the rotating member 571 is fitted in each sliding groove 41 </ b> B of the second tape spool 41.

  Thereby, the protrusion 571 </ b> B and the sliding groove 41 </ b> B cooperate to allow the rotating member 571 to rotate integrally with the second tape spool 41. Further, the support shaft 584 of the lower tape support portion 66B is inserted into the rotating member 571 (specifically, the shaft hole of the cylindrical protrusion 571A) mounted on the second tape spool 41. As a result, the second tape spool 41 can rotate about the support shaft 584 via the rotating member 571.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the state where the support shaft 584 is inserted into the rotating member 571, the cylindrical protrusion 571A faces the upper end surface of the lower base portion 583. The clutch spring 572 is disposed between the cylindrical protrusion 571A with which the annular portion 572A is in close contact and the plurality of locking protrusions 585. The locking portion 572 </ b> B is locked in one of the plurality of locking grooves 586. As described above, the winding direction of the annular portion 572A coincides with the drawing direction (clockwise direction) of the film tape 59. Therefore, the annular portion 572A increases in diameter when a clockwise rotational force is applied in a plan view and decreases in diameter when a counterclockwise rotational force is applied in a plan view.

  A plurality of diameter expansion prevention bodies 587 are provided on the upper end surface of the lower base portion 583. Each diameter-expansion prevention body 587 is a substantially cylindrical body having a small diameter that is erected along the surface of each locking projection 585 facing the support shaft 584. In other words, the plurality of diameter-expansion prevention bodies 587 are provided radially around the support shaft 584 in plan view, and are provided slightly inside the plurality of locking projections 585. The annular portion 572A is located inside the plurality of diameter expansion preventing bodies 587 in plan view. When the diameter of the annular portion 572A is increased to a predetermined width, the annular portion 572A comes into contact with the plurality of diameter-expansion preventing bodies 587. When the diameter of the annular portion 572A is increased to a size that contacts the plurality of diameter-expansion preventing bodies 587, the intimate state between the annular portion 572A and the cylindrical protrusion 571A is released.

  When the second tape spool 41 rotates in the clockwise direction by pulling out the film tape 59, a clockwise rotational force acts on the rotating member 571 via the second tape spool 41. At this time, since the locking portion 572B is locked in the locking groove 586, sliding friction occurs between the cylindrical protrusion 571A and the annular portion 572A, and torque in the clockwise direction is applied to the annular portion 572A. Added. Thereby, the annular portion 572A is rewound and expanded in diameter, and the sliding friction generated between the cylindrical protrusion 571A and the annular portion 572A is reduced. When the diameter of the annular portion 572A is increased to a predetermined width that contacts the plurality of diameter expansion preventing bodies 587, the connection between the clutch spring 572 and the second tape spool 41 is released. At this time, since the rotational load applied to the second tape spool 41 by the clutch spring 572 is relatively small, the second tape spool 41 can rotate smoothly.

  As a result, when the second tape spool 41 rotates in the drawing direction of the film tape 59, a quantitative and stable rotational load (that is, load torque) is applied by the clutch spring 572. Therefore, a stable back tension is applied to the film tape 59, and the amount of the film tape 59 per unit time drawn from the second tape spool 41 can be stabilized. As a result, the running of the film tape 59 during the printing operation can be stabilized, and the deterioration of the printing quality due to the running failure of the film tape 59 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when an external force is applied to rotate the second tape spool 41 in the direction opposite to the drawing direction of the film tape 59 (that is, counterclockwise direction), the rotation member 571 is counterclockwise via the second tape spool 41. Directional rotational force acts. At this time, torque in the counterclockwise direction is applied to the annular portion 572A by the sliding friction generated between the cylindrical protrusion 571A and the annular portion 572A. As a result, the annular portion 572A is wound and reduced in diameter, and the sliding friction generated between the cylindrical protrusion 571A and the annular portion 572A increases. That is, the clutch spring 572 and the second tape spool 41 are connected, and a relatively large rotational load is applied to the second tape spool 41. This restricts the rotation of the film tape 59 in the direction opposite to the pulling direction.

  The annular portion 572A can be expanded to a predetermined width that contacts the plurality of diameter expansion prevention bodies 587 (a diameter expansion width that satisfies the condition that the rotation of the second tape spool 41 is smooth). Excessive diameter expansion of the annular portion 572A is regulated by the plurality of diameter expansion prevention bodies 587. In this case, when the annular portion 572A returns from the expanded diameter state to the reduced diameter state, the degree to which the annular portion 572A is inverted is reduced, so that the action of the second tape spool 41 is also reduced. Therefore, the film tape 59 that has already been pulled out from the second tape spool 41 is unlikely to be pulled back into the cassette case 31 when the annular portion 572A returns from the expanded diameter state to the contracted diameter state.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the upper base portion 581 of the upper tape support portion 66A includes a first diameter portion 581A, a second diameter portion 581B, and a tapered portion 581C. The first diameter portion 581A is a cylindrical portion that protrudes downward from the upper plate 305 and has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41. The tapered portion 581C is a conical cylindrical portion extending downward from the first diameter portion 581A, and the outer diameter gradually decreases downward. The second diameter portion 581B is a bottomed cylindrical portion extending downward from the tapered portion 581C, and has a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the first diameter portion 581A. The aforementioned cylindrical portion 582 is formed on the lower end surface of the second diameter portion 581B.

  The lower base portion 583 of the lower tape support portion 66B includes a first diameter portion 583A, a second diameter portion 583B, and a tapered portion 583C. The first diameter portion 583 </ b> A is a cylindrical portion that protrudes upward from the bottom plate 306 and has an outer diameter substantially the same as the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41. The tapered portion 583C is a conical cylindrical portion extending upward from the first diameter portion 583A, and the outer diameter gradually decreases upward. The second diameter portion 583B is a bottomed cylindrical portion extending upward from the tapered portion 583C, and has a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the first diameter portion 583A. The above-described support shaft 584 is formed on the upper end surface of the second diameter portion 583B.

  As described above, the first diameter portion 583 A of the lower base portion 583 has substantially the same diameter as the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41. Therefore, of the lower tape support portion 66B inserted into the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41, only the first diameter portion 583A contacts the inner wall of the second tape spool 41 and rotatably supports the lower end side. On the other hand, the first diameter portion 581 </ b> A of the upper base portion 581 is slightly smaller in diameter than the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41. Therefore, the entire upper tape support portion 66 </ b> A inserted into the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41 does not contact the inner wall of the second tape spool 41. However, when the second tape spool 41 is biased to the outer peripheral side due to rotation, only the first diameter portion 581A of the upper tape support portion 66A contacts the inner wall of the second tape spool 41, and the second tape spool 41 Rotate and support the upper end of

  Accordingly, the contact area between the second tape spool 41 and the upper tape support portion 66A and the lower tape support portion 66B can be minimized, and the rotational load on the second tape spool 41 can be reduced. Since it is not necessary to apply grease to reduce the rotational load on the second tape spool 41, the recyclability of the second tape spool 41 can be improved.

  By the way, since the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are separate parts, they are molded by separate molds and then assembled by an operator. At this time, the axis of the first diameter portion 581A and the axis of the first diameter portion 583A may not exactly match due to the manufacturing accuracy and assembly error of the upper tape support portion 66A and the lower tape support portion 66B. In other words, in the cassette case 31, the first diameter portion 581A and the first diameter portion 583A may not accurately face each other in the vertical direction.

  In this case, there is a difference between the rotational load applied to the upper end side of the second tape spool 41 by the first diameter portion 581A and the rotational load applied to the lower end side of the second tape spool 41 by the first diameter portion 583A. There is a possibility that the second tape spool 41 may become uneven in rotation. As a countermeasure, in the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process, the operator strictly manages the manufacturing accuracy and assembly error of the upper tape support portion 66A and the lower tape support portion 66B.

  In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the first diameter portion 581A of the upper tape support portion 66A is slightly smaller than the first diameter portion 583A of the lower tape support portion 66B. In other words, in the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41, the first diameter portion 581A has a play in the circumferential direction. Even when the axis of the first diameter portion 581A and the axis of the first diameter portion 583A do not exactly match, the sliding load applied to the upper end side of the second tape spool 41 by the first diameter portion 581A is small.

  Therefore, even when manufacturing accuracy or assembly error of the upper tape support portion 66A and the lower tape support portion 66B occurs, the first diameter portion 583A can appropriately support the rotation of the second tape spool 41. As a result, the occurrence of uneven rotation of the second tape spool 41 can be suppressed, and the burden on the operator who manages the manufacturing accuracy and assembly error as described above can be reduced.

  Since the first diameter portion 583A of the lower base portion 583 has substantially the same diameter as the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41, the vibration of the lower tape support portion 66B generated when the second tape spool 41 rotates is small. On the other hand, since the first diameter portion 581A of the upper base portion 581 is smaller than the shaft hole of the second tape spool 41, the vibration of the upper tape support portion 66A generated when the second tape spool 41 rotates is large. Therefore, the clutch spring 572 of the rotating member 571 mounted on the second tape spool 41 is preferably connected to the lower tape support portion 66B rather than the upper tape support portion 66A.

  A support shaft 584, a locking projection 585, and a locking groove 586 are provided on the lower base portion 583 of the lower tape support portion 66B. The clutch spring 572 of the rotating member 571 mounted on the second tape spool 41 is connected to the lower tape support portion 66B. Thereby, since the vibration of the rotating member 571 generated when the second tape spool 41 rotates can also be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the rotational load applied by the clutch spring 572. As a result, the rotation of the second tape spool 41 can be stabilized.

  The ribbon support hole 67 and the ribbon spool 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, 29, and 32 to 34. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 29, the ribbon spool 42 accommodated in the first ribbon region 420 is rotatably supported through the ribbon support hole 67. The ribbon spool 42 is a cylindrical body having a height substantially the same as the tape width. An unused ink ribbon 60 is wound around the outer peripheral surface of the ribbon spool 42.

  As shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 32, the ribbon support hole 67 includes an upper ribbon support portion 67 </ b> A provided on the lower surface side of the upper plate 305 and a lower ribbon support portion 67 </ b> B provided on the upper surface side of the bottom plate 306. Including. The upper ribbon support part 67A and the lower ribbon support part 67B are provided at positions corresponding to the vertical direction of the cassette case 31 and are connected to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the upper ribbon support portion 67A includes an upper base portion 591, a cylindrical portion 592, a plurality of locking projections 593, and a plurality of locking grooves 594. The upper base 591 is a cylindrical body that protrudes downward from the upper plate 305 and has a lower end surface. The upper base 591 is inserted into the shaft hole 42A of the ribbon spool 42 from above. The cylindrical portion 592 is a small-diameter cylindrical body that protrudes downward from the center of the lower end surface of the upper base portion 591, and has a shaft hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The plurality of locking projections 593 are a plurality of prisms arranged radially around the cylindrical portion 592 in plan view along the periphery of the lower end surface of the upper base portion 591. The plurality of locking grooves 594 are a plurality of groove portions respectively formed between adjacent locking projections 593.

  The lower ribbon support portion 67B includes a lower base portion 595 and a support shaft 596. The lower base 595 is a cylindrical body that protrudes upward from the bottom plate 306 and has an upper end surface. The lower base 595 is inserted into the shaft hole 42A of the ribbon spool 42 from below. The support shaft 596 is a small-diameter shaft body provided upright at the center of the upper end surface of the lower base 595, and the upper end portion is fitted into the shaft hole of the cylindrical portion 592.

  In the present embodiment, the second tape support hole 66 and the ribbon support hole 67 have substantially the same connection structure. Therefore, the shaft diameters of the support shafts 584 and 596, the hole diameters of the cylindrical portions 582 and 592, the number, shape, positional relationship, etc. of the plurality of locking projections 585 and 593 (that is, the locking grooves 586 and 594) are common to each other. is there. The ribbon spool 42 has substantially the same configuration as the second tape spool 41. Therefore, the shaft holes 41A and 42A have the same shape and the same hole diameter, and a sliding groove 42B similar to the sliding groove 41B is also provided on the inner peripheral surface of the shaft hole 42A. However, in the second tape support hole 66, the locking protrusion 585 and the locking groove 586 are provided in the lower case 312, whereas in the ribbon support hole 67, the locking protrusion 593 and the locking groove 594 are formed in the upper case 311. It differs in that it is provided.

  The rotating member 571 and the clutch spring 572 attached to the ribbon spool 42 are common parts with the rotating member 571 and the clutch spring 572 attached to the second tape spool 41. As in the case of being attached to the second tape spool 41, the rotating member 571 to which the clutch spring 572 is attached is attached to the shaft hole 42A of the ribbon spool 42. In the shaft hole 42 </ b> A, each protrusion 571 </ b> B of the rotating member 571 is fitted in each sliding groove 42 </ b> B of the ribbon spool 42. The support shaft 596 of the lower ribbon support portion 67B is inserted into the rotary member 571 (specifically, the shaft hole of the cylindrical protrusion 571A) mounted on the ribbon spool 42.

  However, the rotating member 571 to which the clutch spring 572 is attached is attached in the shaft hole 42A so that the cylindrical protrusion 571A faces the upper ribbon support portion 67A. In other words, the rotating member 571 and the clutch spring 572 are attached to the ribbon spool 42 with the vertical direction reversed from the case of being attached to the second tape spool 41. Thus, the winding direction of the annular portion 572A (that is, the clockwise direction from the front end to the rear end of the annular portion 572A) coincides with the drawing direction (clockwise direction) of the ink ribbon 60 in the bottom view. . That is, the winding direction of the annular portion 572A matches the drawing direction (counterclockwise direction) of the ink ribbon 60 in plan view.

  In a state where the support shaft 596 is inserted into the rotating member 571, the cylindrical projection 571A faces the lower end surface of the upper base portion 591. The clutch spring 572 is disposed between the cylindrical protrusion 571A with which the annular portion 572A is in close contact and the plurality of locking protrusions 593. The locking portion 572B is locked in one of the plurality of locking grooves 594. As described above, the winding direction of the annular portion 572A matches the drawing direction (counterclockwise direction) of the ink ribbon 60. Therefore, the annular portion 572A increases in diameter when a counterclockwise rotational force is applied in a plan view and decreases in diameter when a clockwise rotational force is applied in a plan view.

  When the ribbon spool 42 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by pulling out the ink ribbon 60, the ribbon spool 42 is smoothly smoothed by the enlarged diameter of the annular portion 572A, as in the case where the second tape spool 41 is rotated in the clockwise direction. It can be rotated. On the other hand, when an external force is applied to rotate the ribbon spool 42 in the direction opposite to the drawing direction of the ink ribbon 60 (that is, clockwise), the same as when the second tape spool 41 is rotated counterclockwise. A large rotational load is applied to the ribbon spool 42 by the reduced diameter of the annular portion 572A.

  In the present embodiment, the upper base portion 591 of the upper ribbon support portion 67A has the same configuration as the upper base portion 581 described above, and includes a first diameter portion 591A, a second diameter portion 591B, and a tapered portion 591C (see FIG. 33). . The lower base portion 595 of the lower ribbon support portion 67B has the same configuration as the lower base portion 583 described above, and includes a first diameter portion 595A, a second diameter portion 595B, and a tapered portion 595C (see FIG. 33). However, the first diameter portion 591A of the upper base portion 591 is a cylindrical portion having an outer diameter substantially the same as the shaft hole of the ribbon spool 42. The first diameter portion 595A of the lower base portion 595 is a cylindrical portion whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the shaft hole of the ribbon spool 42.

  Of the upper ribbon support portion 67A inserted into the shaft hole of the ribbon spool 42, only the first diameter portion 591A contacts the inner wall of the ribbon spool 42 and rotationally supports the upper end side. On the other hand, the lower ribbon support portion 67B inserted into the shaft hole of the ribbon spool 42 does not contact the inner wall of the ribbon spool 42 as a whole. However, when the ribbon spool 42 is biased to the outer peripheral side due to rotation, only the first diameter portion 595A of the lower ribbon support portion 67B contacts the inner wall of the ribbon spool 42, and the lower end side of the ribbon spool 42 is rotationally supported. To do.

  As a result, the contact area between the ribbon spool 42 and the upper ribbon support portion 67A and the lower ribbon support portion 67B can be minimized, and the rotational load on the ribbon spool 42 can be reduced. Since it is not necessary to apply grease to reduce the rotational load of the ribbon spool 42, the recyclability of the ribbon spool 42 can be improved.

  Since the first diameter portion 591A of the upper base portion 591 has substantially the same diameter as the shaft hole of the ribbon spool 42, the vibration of the upper ribbon support portion 67A generated when the ribbon spool 42 rotates is small. On the other hand, since the first diameter portion 595A of the lower base portion 595 is smaller than the shaft hole of the ribbon spool 42, the vibration of the lower ribbon support portion 67B generated when the ribbon spool 42 rotates is large. Therefore, the clutch spring 572 of the rotating member 571 mounted on the ribbon spool 42 is preferably connected to the upper ribbon support portion 67A rather than the lower ribbon support portion 67B.

  The upper base portion 591 of the upper ribbon support portion 67A is provided with a cylindrical portion 592, a locking projection 593, and a locking groove 594. The clutch spring 572 of the rotating member 571 mounted on the ribbon spool 42 is connected to the upper ribbon support portion 67A. Thereby, since the vibration of the rotating member 571 generated when the ribbon spool 42 is rotated can also be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the rotational load applied by the clutch spring 572. As a result, the rotation of the ribbon spool 42 can be stabilized.

  A method of assembling the second tape spool 41 and the ribbon spool 42 to the cassette case 31 when the tape cassette 30 is manufactured will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the operator stores the second tape spool 41 around which the film tape 59 is wound in the second lower tape area 410B. At this time, the operator inserts the support shaft 584 of the lower case 312 into the shaft hole 41 </ b> A of the second tape spool 41.

  Next, the worker mounts the rotating member 571 with the clutch spring 572 mounted in the shaft hole 41 </ b> A of the second tape spool 41. At this time, the operator inserts each protrusion 571B into each sliding groove 41B, and inserts the support shaft 584 into the shaft hole of the cylindrical protrusion 571A. However, the operator mounts the rotating member 571 in the shaft hole 41A so that the cylindrical protrusion 571A (that is, the clutch spring 572) faces downward. Then, since the locking portion 572B is locked in one of the locking grooves 586 in the shaft hole 41A, back tension is applied to the film tape 59. Therefore, even before the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, it is possible to suppress the film tape 59 wound around the second tape spool 41 from expanding to the outer peripheral side.

  On the other hand, the worker stores the ribbon spool 42 around which the ink ribbon 60 is wound in the first lower ribbon region 420B. At this time, the support shaft 596 of the lower case 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 42 </ b> A of the ribbon spool 42.

  Next, the operator mounts the rotating member 571 with the clutch spring 572 mounted in the shaft hole 42 </ b> A of the ribbon spool 42. At this time, the operator inserts each protrusion 571B into each sliding groove 42B, and inserts the support shaft 596 into the cylindrical protrusion 571A. However, the worker mounts the rotating member 571 in the shaft hole 42A so that the cylindrical protrusion 571A (that is, the clutch spring 572) faces upward. In other words, the operator attaches the rotating member 571 to which the clutch spring 572 is attached to the second tape spool 41 and the ribbon spool 42 so that the respective vertical directions are reversed.

  In a state before the upper case 311 is assembled to the lower case 312, since the locking portion 572 </ b> B is not locked to the locking groove 594, no back tension is applied to the ink ribbon 60. However, the ink ribbon 60 is thinner than the film tape 59 and the like, and contains a magnetic material as a material component. For this reason, the ink ribbon 60 is easily maintained in a wound state due to the influence of static electricity or the like. That is, the ink ribbon 60 wound around the ribbon spool 42 is unlikely to bulge to the outer peripheral side even if no back tension is applied.

  Finally, the operator attaches the upper case 311 to the lower case 312 and fits the upper ends of the support shafts 584 and 596 of the lower case 312 into the shaft holes of the cylindrical portions 582 and 592 of the upper case 311, respectively. Since the locking portion 572B is locked in one of the locking grooves 594 in the shaft hole 42A, back tension is also applied to the ink ribbon 60. As described above, when the upper case 311 and the lower case 312 are assembled, the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 are not easily separated, so that the assembling property of the cassette case 31 can be improved.

  By using a common configuration for the brake members (rotating member 571 and clutch spring 572) for applying back tension to the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60, the design and manufacture of the tape cassette 30 can be facilitated. . In particular, by making the brake member the same component, the component management of the brake member can be facilitated. Assembling errors of the brake member with respect to the second tape spool 41 and the ribbon spool 42 can be suppressed. Since the brake member has a simple structure including the rotating member 571 and the clutch spring 572, the assembly of the brake member can be facilitated.

  When the second tape spool 41 is rotated in the drawing direction of the film tape 59, the film tape 59 is drawn out smoothly. At this time, a small back tension is applied to the film tape 59 to such an extent that the film tape 59 is not pulled out excessively. When the second tape spool 41 is rotated in the direction opposite to the drawing direction of the film tape 59, a large back tension is applied to the film tape 59 so as to restrict the rotation of the second tape spool 41. Therefore, the film tape 59 can be stably conveyed, and generation of wrinkles and slack in the film tape 59 can be suppressed.

  When the ribbon spool 42 is rotated in the drawing direction of the ink ribbon 60, the ink ribbon 60 is drawn out smoothly. At this time, a small back tension is applied to the ink ribbon 60 to such an extent that the ink ribbon 60 is not pulled out excessively. When the ribbon spool 42 is rotated in the direction opposite to the drawing direction of the ink ribbon 60, a large back tension is applied to the ink ribbon 60 so as to restrict the rotation of the ribbon spool 42. Therefore, the ink ribbon 60 can be stably conveyed, and occurrence of wrinkles and slack in the ink ribbon 60 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, since the roller member 535 is provided in the bending part 533 (refer FIGS. 5-8, FIG. 29), the load added to a tape on a tape conveyance path | route is reduced. Therefore, the back tension due to the brake member can be stably applied to the film tape 59. Further, the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 are transported in a state where the transport directions of the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 are opposite to each other and separated to the printing position.

  Therefore, even when the second tape area 410 and the first ribbon area 420 are adjacent to each other, the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 are not easily dragged to each other. The back tension applied to the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 can be prevented from interfering with each other, and the film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 can be stably conveyed.

  By the way, for example, the tape discharged from the discharge port 341 of the arm unit 34 may be accidentally pushed into the arm unit 34 from the discharge port 341 by an unauthorized operation of the user. In this case, if the tape pushed in from the discharge port 341 exceeds the allowable amount, there is a possibility that it will flow backward in the cassette case 31. As a result, the backflowed tape spreads in the vicinity of the first ribbon area 420 or in the second tape area 410, which may cause a jam.

  In the present embodiment, the aforementioned restriction rib 532 (see FIGS. 5 to 8 and FIG. 29) is provided in the vicinity of the first ribbon region 420. When the tape is pushed in from the discharge port 341, the restriction rib 532 prevents the backflowed tape from spreading in the vicinity of the first ribbon region 420. Along with this, the backflowed tape is also prevented from entering the second tape region 410. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of jam due to the tape being pushed in from the discharge port 341.

  The take-up spool support hole 68 and the ribbon take-up spool 44 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, 29, and 35. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 29, the ribbon take-up spool 44 is rotatably supported via the take-up spool support hole 68 while being housed in the second ribbon region 440. As shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 35, the take-up spool support hole 68 includes an opening 68 </ b> A formed in the upper plate 305 and an opening 68 </ b> B formed in the bottom plate 306. The opening 68 </ b> A and the opening 68 </ b> B are through holes provided at positions corresponding to the vertical direction of the cassette case 31.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the ribbon take-up spool 44 is a cylindrical body having a height substantially equal to the height of the cassette case 31. At the upper end edge and the lower end edge of the ribbon take-up spool 44, flange-like support portions 44E that protrude along the entire outer circumference are provided. The vertical lengths of the upper support portion 44E and the lower support portion 44E are substantially equal to the width of the ink ribbon 60. Of the outer peripheral surface of the ribbon take-up spool 44, the used ink ribbon 60 is wound between the upper support portion 44E and the lower support portion 44E.

  Inside the cassette case 31, the upper end 44A of the ribbon take-up spool 44 is fitted into the opening 68A, and the lower end 44B is fitted into the opening 68B. Since the support portion 44E is in contact with the lower surface of the upper plate 305 at the upper end edge of the ribbon take-up spool 44, the upward movement of the ribbon take-up spool 44 is restricted. At the lower end edge of the ribbon take-up spool 44, since the support portion 44E is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 306, the downward movement of the ribbon take-up spool 44 is restricted. Thereby, the ribbon take-up spool 44 is rotatably supported by the upper end portion 44A and the lower end portion 44B.

  A shaft hole 44 </ b> C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the ribbon take-up spool 44. On the inner peripheral surface of the ribbon take-up spool 44 (that is, the inner wall forming the shaft hole 44C), a plurality of ribs 44D extending upward from the lower end portion are provided. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the ribbon take-up shaft 95 (see FIG. 45) is inserted into the shaft hole 44C through the opening 68B. Within the shaft hole 44C, the plurality of cam members 95A (see FIG. 45) mesh with the plurality of ribs 44D. Thereby, the rotation of the ribbon take-up shaft 95 is transmitted to the ribbon take-up spool 44. The diameter of the shaft hole 44C is slightly larger than the shaft diameter of the ribbon take-up shaft 95. Therefore, the ribbon take-up shaft 95 inserted into the shaft hole 44C has a little play in the circumferential direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 35, a clutch spring 340 is provided at the lower end of the ribbon take-up spool 44. The clutch spring 340 is wound directly below the lower support portion 44E. A tip end portion of the coil projecting radially outward from the clutch spring 340 is a spring end portion 340A. The spring end 340 </ b> A is fitted in the spring mounting groove 328 of the lower case 312. The spring mounting groove 328 is a groove formed in the bottom plate 306, and extends from the opening 68B to the rear right side (upper left in FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, a spring fixing wall 329 is provided on the inner side of the lower case 312 and extends upward from the bottom plate 306 across the spring mounting groove 328. On the spring fixing wall 329, a groove portion 329A extending upward from the spring mounting groove 328 is formed. A triangular region in plan view surrounded by a spring fixing wall 329, a wall portion extending rearward from the right end portion of the spring fixing wall 329, and a wall portion extending rightward from the left end portion of the spring fixing wall 329 is a spring. It is a fixing part 345.

  When the ribbon take-up spool 44 is attached, the spring end portion 340A is attached to the spring attachment groove 328 from above via the groove portion 329A. The tip of the spring end 340A is bent upward. The bent tip of the spring end 340 </ b> A is fixed in the spring fixing portion 345. The clutch spring 340 applies a large rotational load to the ribbon take-up spool 44 when an external force that rotates the ribbon take-up spool 44 in a direction opposite to the take-up direction of the ink ribbon 60 (clockwise direction) is applied.

  The spring fixing portion 345 is provided on the rear side of the first lower ribbon region 420B and on the right rear side of the second lower ribbon region 440B. In other words, the spring fixing portion 345 is configured so that the transport path of the ink ribbon 60 drawn from the ribbon spool 42 (that is, the left direction of the first lower ribbon region 420B) and the ink ribbon 60 wound on the ribbon take-up spool 44 are used. It is provided at a position different from the conveyance path (that is, the lower left direction of the second lower ribbon area 440B). Therefore, when the operator attaches / detaches the ribbon take-up spool 44 to / from the lower case 312, the possibility that the spring end 340 </ b> A contacts the ink ribbon 60 and is damaged can be reduced.

  When the ribbon take-up spool 44 is attached to the lower case 312, the distal end portion of the spring end portion 340 </ b> A is fixed by the spring fixing portion 345. Thereby, even when the upper case 311 is not assembled, the standing state of the ribbon take-up spool 44 attached to the lower case 312 can be stabilized. Therefore, the ribbon take-up spool 44 attached to the second lower ribbon region 440B can be prevented from falling before the upper case 311 is assembled.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 to 20 and FIG. 29, a mounting guide wall 335 is erected continuously from the right end portion of the isolation wall 48. The mounting guide wall 335 extends upward from the bottom plate 306 adjacent to the left side of the second lower ribbon region 440B. The mounting guide wall 335 extends to a height position in contact with the upper plate 305 in a state where the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are joined. The mounting guide wall 335 extends along a part of the outer peripheral edge of the ribbon take-up spool 44 (specifically, a part of the support portion 44E) in a state where the ribbon take-up spool 44 is attached to the second ribbon region 440. Yes.

  When the operator attaches the ribbon take-up spool 44 to the lower case 312, the ribbon take-up spool 44 is guided along the attachment guide wall 335 into the second lower ribbon region 440 </ b> B. The ribbon take-up spool 44 attached to the second lower ribbon region 440B is stabilized in the standing state by the mounting guide wall 335 even when the upper case 311 is not assembled. Therefore, the ribbon take-up spool 44 attached to the second lower ribbon region 440B can be further prevented from falling before the upper case 311 is assembled.

  Furthermore, the mounting guide wall 335 is provided adjacent to the right front side of the first lower tape region 400B. The above-described spacers 980 are attached to both end faces of the double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40. In the first tape region 400, the mounting guide wall 335 is adjacent to the periphery of the spacer 980. When the double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40 moves in the front / rear / left / right direction within the first tape region 400, the mounting guide wall 335 contacts the periphery of the spacer 980.

  Thereby, for example, even when the tape cassette 30 is vibrated or inclined, the displacement of the spacer 980 attached to the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is suppressed. The spacer 980 is prevented from entering other regions (specifically, the second ribbon region 440, the second tape region 410, etc.). That is, the spacer 980 is prevented from contacting other spools (specifically, the ribbon take-up spool 44, the second tape spool 41, etc.). As a result, rotation failure of the ribbon take-up spool 44 and the like can be suppressed.

  On the opposite side of the mounting guide wall 335 across the plane center of the first lower tape region 400B (specifically, the opening 65B), that is, on the left rear side of the first lower tape region 400B, A wall 70 is provided. The first peripheral wall 70 is provided along a part of the outer peripheral edge of the first lower tape region 400B, and reaches a height position where the first peripheral wall 70 contacts the upper plate 305 in a state where the lower case 312 and the upper case 311 are joined. It extends. When the double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40 moves in the front / rear / left / right direction within the first tape region 400, the first peripheral wall 70 also contacts the periphery of the spacer 980.

  That is, in the first tape region 400, the displacement of the spacer 980 attached to the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is suppressed by the mounting guide wall 335 and the first peripheral wall 70. Therefore, rotation failure of the ribbon take-up spool 44 and the like can be more reliably suppressed. Furthermore, the operator simply moves the spacer 980 attached to the double-sided adhesive tape 58 along the mounting guide wall 335 and the first peripheral wall 70, and the first tape spool 40 around which the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is wound. Can be arranged at an appropriate position in the first tape region 400.

  The guide hole 47 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15, 16, and 36. As shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 36, the guide hole 47 is a hole provided in the second corner 322 of the cassette case 31 and penetrating in the vertical direction of the cassette case 31. The guide hole 47 includes an opening 47A, an opening 47B, and a shaft hole 47C. The opening 47 </ b> A and the opening 47 </ b> B are through holes provided at positions corresponding to the vertical direction of the cassette case 31.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the opening 47A is formed in the upper surface of the second corner 322 (that is, the upper plate 305 in the second corner 322). The opening 47B is formed in the lower surface of the second corner 322 (that is, the bottom plate 306 in the second corner 322). The lower case 312 is provided with a cylindrical tube wall portion 589 extending upward from the opening 47B. Inside the cassette case 31, the upper end of the cylindrical wall portion 589 is connected to the opening 47A. The shaft hole 47C extends in the vertical direction inside the cylindrical wall portion 589, and allows the openings 47A and 47B to communicate with each other.

  As described above, the guide hole 47 of the present embodiment is a long hole having an opening width along the dividing line K as a major axis and an opening width along the virtual line G as a minor axis in plan view (see FIG. 15). However, the guide hole 47 may be configured in an arbitrary opening shape exemplified by a round hole, an elliptical hole, a long hole, and the like.

  With reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. 17, the positional relationship of each part provided in the tape cassette 30 is demonstrated. A two-dot chain line drawn obliquely in FIG. 15 indicates a dividing line K described later. The roller support hole 64, the guide hole 47, the first tape support hole 65, the take-up spool support hole 68, and the head insertion portion 39 are the tape drive shaft 100, guide shaft 120, auxiliary shaft 110, and ribbon of the cassette mounting portion 8. They are provided at positions facing the winding shaft 95 and the head holder 74, respectively.

  Specifically, the roller support hole 64 is formed in a region Q1 including the fourth corner portion 324 of the tape cassette 30. The region Q1 is adjacent to the left side of the head insertion portion 39 provided at the front center of the tape cassette 30. In other words, the region Q1 is located downstream of the head insertion portion 39 in the tape transport direction. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the fourth corner portion 324 faces the area P1 (see FIG. 4) of the cassette mounting portion 8.

  The guide hole 47 is formed in the region Q2 including the second corner portion 322 of the tape cassette 30. When the tape cassette 30 is viewed in plan, the second corner portion 322 included in the region Q2 is located diagonally to the fourth corner portion 324 included in the region Q1. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the second corner portion 322 faces the area P2 (see FIG. 4) of the cassette mounting portion 8.

  When the tape cassette 30 is divided in plan view with respect to the dividing line K that connects the roller support hole 64 and the guide hole 47 in plan view, the area Q3 occupies the rear side of the dividing line K. The region Q4 occupies the front side of K. The first tape support hole 65 is formed at or near the center of gravity of the region Q3 that is triangular in plan view (that is, the intersection that connects the middle lines of the three sides forming the region Q3). The take-up spool support hole 68 is formed at or near the center of gravity of the region Q4 having a triangular shape in plan view (that is, the intersection connecting the middle lines of the three sides forming the region Q4). The first tape support hole 65 and the take-up spool support hole 68 are located substantially symmetrically about the dividing line K in plan view.

  The second tape support hole 66 is formed on the dividing line K in a plan view, and specifically, is located substantially in the middle between the center of the tape cassette 30 in a plan view and the guide hole 47. The ribbon support hole 67 is formed in the region Q4. Specifically, the ribbon support hole 67 is located on the right front side of the tape cassette 30 with respect to the take-up spool support hole 68.

  Due to the positional relationship as described above, the weight distribution of the laminate-type tape cassette 30 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) is as follows. In the first tape support hole 65, the first tape spool 40 is rotatably supported inside the cassette case 31. This means that the rotation center of the first tape spool 40 (that is, the shaft hole 40D) is provided within the region Q3 in plan view. In other words, the center of gravity of the double-sided adhesive tape 58 wound around the first tape spool 40 is located within the range of the region Q3 in plan view.

  In the ribbon support hole 67, the ribbon spool 42 around which the unused ink ribbon 60 is wound is rotatably supported. In the take-up spool support hole 68, the ribbon take-up spool 44 around which the used ink ribbon 60 is wound is rotatably supported. Therefore, the center of gravity of the ink ribbon 60 is located within the range of the region Q4 in plan view. In the second tape support hole 66, the second tape spool 41 around which the film tape 59 is wound is rotatably supported. Therefore, the center of gravity of the film tape 59 is located on the dividing line K in plan view.

  From the above, in the laminate type tape cassette 30, the weight of the region Q3 and the weight of the region Q4 with the dividing line K as a reference are approximated. Furthermore, the center of gravity of the entire tape cassette 30 is located on or near the dividing line K in plan view. Such a weight distribution can improve the handleability of the tape cassette 30, so that the user can accurately position the tape cassette 30.

  For example, the tape cassette 30 having the weight distribution as described above is pushed vertically into the cassette mounting portion 8 while the user holds the left and right ends of the cassette case 31 with fingers while maintaining the top surface 301 and the bottom surface 302 substantially horizontal. . At this time, the tape cassette 30 is inclined with the dividing line K as the rotation center due to the fact that the weight deviation in the tape cassette 30 is small and the center of gravity of the tape cassette 30 is located on or near the dividing line K. Is suppressed. Further, even when the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is heavier than the ink ribbon 60, the weight difference between the region Q3 and the region Q4 is further reduced by the weight of the ribbon take-up spool 44 (that is, the weight deviation of the tape cassette 30). Is reduced).

  The weight distribution of the receptor type tape cassette 30 (see FIG. 7) is as follows. In the first tape support hole 65, the first tape spool 40 around which the printing tape 57 is wound is rotatably supported. Therefore, the center of gravity of the printing tape 57 is located within the range of the region Q3 in plan view. On the other hand, the center of gravity of the ink ribbon 60 is located within the range of the region Q4 in plan view, similarly to the laminate-type tape cassette 30 (see FIGS. 5 and 6).

  Therefore, the receptor type tape cassette 30 also approximates the weight of the region Q3 and the region Q4 with respect to the dividing line K. Further, even when the printing tape 57 is heavier than the ink ribbon 60, the weight difference between the region Q3 and the region Q4 is further reduced by the weight of the ribbon take-up spool 44. Therefore, the handling property of the tape cassette 30 can be improved similarly to the above laminate type.

  Further, when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the guide shaft of the tape printer 1 is inserted into the cavity of the tape cassette 30. The guide shaft is a shaft portion provided in the cassette mounting portion 8 and guides the tape cassette 30 in the attaching / detaching direction (vertical direction in the present embodiment) while being inserted into the cavity of the tape cassette 30. The cavity is any one of an opening, a hole, and a recess provided in the cassette case 31, and guides the tape cassette 30 in the attaching / detaching direction with the guide shaft of the tape printer 1 inserted.

  In this embodiment, the tape drive shaft 100, the guide shaft 120, and the auxiliary shaft 110 are illustrated as guide shafts. The roller support hole 64, the guide hole 47, and the first tape support hole 65 are illustrated as cavities. By inserting at least one of the plurality of guide shafts into the corresponding cavity, the tape cassette 30 is guided to an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, details will be described later.

  The details of the arm front wall 35 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. In the following description, a tape cassette 30 having a tape width of a predetermined width (for example, 18 mm) or more is referred to as a wide cassette 30. A tape cassette 30 having a tape width less than a predetermined width is referred to as a narrow cassette 30. As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the tape cassette 30 of this embodiment is a wide cassette 30.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the arm front wall 35 includes an arm index portion 800 and a locking hole 820. The arm index portion 800 indicates the tape type of the tape cassette 30 including at least one hole. A person can identify the tape type by looking at the arm index portion 800. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting unit 8, the tape printer 1 can specify the tape type by detecting information indicated by the arm index unit 800 by the arm detection unit 200.

  In the present embodiment, the arm indicator portion 800 and the locking hole 820 are provided in the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B among the arm front walls 35. The tape type specified by the arm index unit 800 is information (printing information) necessary for executing proper printing in the tape printer 1. Hereinafter, the area | region which the arm front wall 35 has and the structure in the area | region are demonstrated.

  The arm front wall 35 includes a specific region R0 located upstream of the discharge port 341 in the tape transport direction. The length of the specific region R0 in the left-right direction is equal to or less than the distance L0 between the discharge port 341 and the discharge guide portion 49. Between the discharge port 341 and the discharge guide portion 49, the tape discharged from the discharge port 341 is conveyed toward the discharge guide portion 49 while exposing the surface opposite to the printing surface to the front. That is, the distance L0 is synonymous with the tape exposure length, which is the length at which the tape is exposed. In the present embodiment, the entire arm front wall 35 between the discharge port 341 and the left end of the semicircular groove 84 is the specific region R0.

  The specific region R0 includes a first region R1 in which the locking hole 820 is formed, and a second region R2 including the arm index portion 800 other than the first region R1. Below, each area | region is demonstrated in order of 2nd area | region R2 and 1st area | region R1.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the second region R2 includes a vertical information section X and a horizontal information section Y. The vertical information section X is a plurality of strip-shaped sections extending along a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 38) orthogonal to the tape transport direction. The lateral information section Y is a plurality of strip-shaped sections extending in parallel with the tape transport direction (left and right direction in FIG. 38).

  The vertical information section X of the present embodiment includes five vertical information sections X1 to X5. The vertical information sections X1 to X5 are arranged at intervals from the discharge port 341, and are arranged at equal intervals from the left side to the right side in a front view. The vertical information section X1 is located on the most downstream side (that is, the leftmost side) in the tape transport direction among the vertical information sections X1 to X5. Vertical information sections X2, X3, X4, and X5 are provided in order from the vertical information section X1 toward the upstream side (that is, the right side) in the tape transport direction. The vertical lengths of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 (that is, the lengths in the left-right direction) are substantially equal, and adjacent vertical information sections in the vertical information sections X1 to X5 are adjacent to each other at equal intervals.

  The lateral information area Y of the present embodiment includes three lateral information areas Y1 to Y3. The lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 are arranged side by side from the upper side to the lower side in a front view. The lateral information section Y1 located at the uppermost position among the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 is provided at a position where the center in the vertical direction is substantially the center of the height of the arm front wall 35. The lateral information areas Y2 and Y3 are provided in order from the lateral information area Y1 to the lower side. The lateral lengths (that is, the vertical lengths) of the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 are substantially equal, and adjacent lateral information sections in the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 are adjacent to each other at substantially equal intervals.

  As shown in FIG. 39, of the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 of the present embodiment, the upper lateral information sections Y1 and Y2 are within a predetermined height dimension (hereinafter referred to as a predetermined height) T1 in the arm front wall 35. It is provided in the inside. Hereinafter, a region within the range of the predetermined height T1 is referred to as a common indicator portion 831. More preferably, the common indicator portion 831 is a region that is symmetrical in the vertical direction about the center line N in the vertical direction (that is, the height direction) of the cassette case 31. The predetermined height T1 is equal to the smallest height among the heights of the plurality of tape cassettes 30 having different tape widths. On the other hand, an area other than the common index part 831 within the range of the predetermined height T2 (T2> T1) is referred to as an extension part 832.

  The horizontal information section Y3 located at the lowermost position among the horizontal information sections Y1 to Y3 is arranged differently depending on the wide cassette 30 and the narrow cassette 30. In the wide cassette 30, the lateral information section Y3 is arranged across the common indicator portion 831 and the lower extension portion 832. In the narrow cassette 30, since the height of the tape cassette 30 is equal to the predetermined height T1, the extension portion 832 does not exist. Therefore, in the narrow cassette 30, the lateral information section Y3 is disposed along the lower end portion of the common indicator portion 831, that is, the lower end portion of the arm front wall 35.

  The second region R2 is a region facing the arm detection switch 210 when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting unit 8. In the second region R2, an arm indicator portion 800 including vertical information sections X1 to X5 is provided. A hole is formed in at least one of the vertical information sections X1 to X5. Whether or not a hole is formed in each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 is determined in advance according to the printing information. The arm index part 800 specifies printing information by a combination of whether or not holes are formed in each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5. A person can recognize the printing information by viewing the combination of the holes formed in the vertical information sections X1 to X5.

  When the vertical information sections X1 to X5 are arranged at regular intervals as in the present embodiment, even if there is an area where no hole is formed in the vertical information sections X1 to X5, the person is Can be easily identified. That is, in the vertical information areas X1 to X5, a person can accurately identify the area where the hole is formed and the area where the hole is not formed, visually.

  The position where the hole is formed in the vertical direction of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 may be determined for each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5. For example, among the plurality of regions in which the vertical information sections X1 to X5 and the horizontal information sections Y1 to Y3 intersect and overlap (hereinafter referred to as overlapping regions), one overlapping region is provided for each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5. Determined as an indicator section. The arm index part 800 may specify the printing information by a combination of whether or not a hole is formed in the index part. In this case, if the position corresponding to the arm detection switch 210 (see FIG. 11) is determined as the indicator, the tape printer 1 can also specify the printing information.

  In the present embodiment, when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the five overlapping areas facing the five arm detection switches 210A to 210E (see FIG. 11) are the indicator portions 800A to 800E. Function. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, a region where the vertical information section X1 and the horizontal information section Y2 intersect and overlap functions as an index unit 800A facing the arm detection switch 210A.

  A region where the vertical information section X2 and the horizontal information section Y1 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 800B facing the arm detection switch 210B. A region where the vertical information section X3 and the horizontal information section Y2 intersect and overlap functions as an indicator portion 800C facing the arm detection switch 210C. A region where the vertical information section X4 and the horizontal information section Y1 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 800D facing the arm detection switch 210D. A region where the vertical information section X5 and the horizontal information section Y3 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 800E facing the arm detection switch 210E.

  In this way, one indicator portion is arranged in each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5. Furthermore, the indicator parts of adjacent vertical information areas are not lined up in the left-right direction. That is, the indicator portions 800A to 800E are arranged in a zigzag manner. When such an arrangement is adopted, even if the indicator portions of adjacent vertical information areas are all configured by holes, the indicator portion of the vertical information area adjacent to the indicator portion of a certain vertical information area And can be more easily distinguished.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38, holes are formed in the indicator portions 800A, 800C, and 800D. The indicator portions 800B and 800E are part of the surface portion included in the arm front wall 35 in which no hole is formed. Thus, each of the indicator portions 800A to 800E is configured by a hole or a surface portion that can be identified by human eyes. Furthermore, these hole portions and surface portions function as a non-pressing portion 801 and a pressing portion 802, which will be described later, respectively. The relationship between the index parts 800A to 800E and the arm detection switch 210 will be described in detail later.

  The first region R1 faces the locking piece 225 (see FIG. 11) when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 and the platen holder 12 is moved to the printing position (see FIGS. 6 to 8). It is an area to do. As shown in FIG. 39, the first region R1 is provided in the common indicator portion 831. A locking hole 820 into which the locking piece 225 is inserted is formed in the first region R1. 1st area | region R1 is larger than the area | region corresponding to the back view shape of the latching piece 225 at least.

  The first region R1 is disposed at a distance from the discharge port 341 of the arm portion 34, and the right end portion thereof is located at least on the upstream side (that is, the right side) in the tape transport direction with respect to the longitudinal information section X1. . In the example of FIG. 38, the right end portion of the vertical information section X5 located on the most upstream side in the tape transport direction among the vertical information sections X1 to X5 is positioned on the substantially center line in the left-right direction of the first region R1. Therefore, the right end portion of the locking hole 820 is located on the upstream side (that is, the right side) in the tape transport direction with respect to all the vertical information sections X1 to X5. The length of the first region R1 in the left-right direction is approximately twice the width of the vertical information sections X1 to X5.

  The first region R1 is provided on the upper side adjacent to the lateral information section Y1 located at the uppermost position among the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3. That is, the upper end portion of the locking hole 820 is located above all of the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3. In the example of FIG. 38, the vertical length of the first region R1 is about 2/3 of the width of the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3.

  The locking hole 820 is a slit-shaped through hole extending in the left-right direction. When the platen holder 12 is moved between the standby position (see FIG. 5) and the printing position (see FIGS. 6 to 8) in a state where the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the locking is performed. The piece 225 is inserted into and removed from the locking hole 820. The locking hole 820 may be a hole having the same shape as the first region R1, or may be a hole having a size including the first region R1. The locking hole 820 may be formed as a recess instead of a through hole. The lower wall of the locking hole 820 is an inclined portion 821 that is inclined with respect to the horizontal direction (see FIG. 50). The opening width of the locking hole 820 in the vertical direction is gradually reduced backward by the inclined portion 821.

  With reference to FIG. 37, the positional relationship of the various components in the arm front wall 35 will be described. In FIG. 37, the center line C is the center line in the left-right direction of the cassette case 31. The arm index portion 800 of this embodiment is provided on the center position in the left-right direction of the cassette case 31, that is, on the center line C. The distance L0 indicates the distance (tape exposure length) between the discharge port 341 and the discharge guide portion 49. The distance L1 indicates the distance from the center line C to the left and right reference line C1.

  The left-right reference line C1 is a virtual line that specifies the position in the left-right direction where the locking hole 820 is provided. As the left-right reference line C1, a line in which the locking hole 820 is always located on the line may be used. The vertical reference line C2 is a virtual line that specifies the position in the vertical direction where the locking hole 820 is provided. As the vertical reference line C2, a line in which the locking hole 820 is always positioned on the line may be used. For example, the vertical center line of the first region R1 can be used.

  A range LW1 indicates a range of 14 to 20% of the tape exposure length L0 from the center line C toward the downstream side in the tape conveyance direction (left direction in FIG. 37). A range LW2 indicates a range of 30 to 36% of the tape exposure length L0 from the discharge port 341 of the arm portion 34 toward the upstream side in the tape transport direction.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the length in the left-right direction of the specific region R0 is equal to or shorter than the tape exposure length L0. The distance L1 is in the range of 18 to 24% of the tape exposure length L0 toward the upstream side in the tape conveyance direction (right direction in FIG. 37). The vertical reference line C2 is in the common indicator portion 831. At least a part of the vertical information section X1 is in the range LW1. At least a part of the vertical information section X1 is in the range LW2. The distance between the center lines in the left-right direction of adjacent vertical information sections is within a range of 7 to 10% of the tape exposure length L0.

  As described above, the positional relationship of various components in the arm front wall 35 is defined for the following reason.

  First, the distance L1 is preferably in the range of 18 to 24% of the tape exposure length L0. This is because if the distance L1 is larger than the range of 18 to 24% of the tape exposure length L0, the locking hole 820 may be located outside the range of the specific region R0. On the contrary, if the distance L1 is smaller than the range of 18 to 24% of the tape exposure length L0, the horizontal range of the specific region R0 is shortened, and for example, there is a possibility that five columns of vertical information areas cannot be arranged. .

  For example, it is assumed that a person visually identifies the lower case 312 and specifies a tape to be stored in the cassette case 31. In this case, even when no tape is attached to the lower case 312, the person can visually identify the length of the tape exposure length L 0 and the position of the center line C. Furthermore, the person can specify the position of the locking hole 820 with reference to the tape exposure length L0 and the center line C.

  Second, it is preferable that at least a part of the vertical information section X1 is in the range LW1. Third, it is preferable that at least a part of the vertical information section X1 is in the range LW2. This is because if the vertical information section X1 is outside the ranges of LW1 and LW2, the vertical information section X1 is too close to the discharge port 341 and a short shot may occur when the lower case 312 is molded. Conversely, the vertical information section X1 is too far from the discharge port 341, and there is a possibility that, for example, five columns of vertical information sections may not be arranged within the specific area R0.

  In this case, the person can specify the position of the vertical information section X1 with reference to the ranges LW1 and LW2. In particular, the position of the vertical information section X1 can be specified more easily and accurately with reference to the center line C and the discharge port 341, which are easily specified by human eyes. Furthermore, when specifying the position of the vertical information section X1, only a certain limited range needs to be visually observed, so that the burden on the user can be suppressed.

  Fourth, the vertical information sections X1 to X5 may be positioned in the left-right direction so that the distance between the center lines in the left-right direction of adjacent vertical information sections is within a range of 7 to 10% of the tape exposure length L0. preferable. This is because it becomes difficult to distinguish the adjacent vertical information areas if the distance between the center lines in the left-right direction of the adjacent vertical information areas is shorter than this. On the other hand, if the distance between the center lines in the left-right direction of adjacent vertical information sections is longer than this, it is impossible to arrange vertical information sections of, for example, five columns within the range of the specific region R0. Thereby, the person can specify the positions of the other vertical information sections X2 to X5 with reference to the vertical information section X1.

  By defining various positional relationships of the arm front wall 35 as described above, it becomes possible for a person to easily recognize the positions of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 and the indicator portions 800A to 800E by visual observation. The reason will be described below.

  When a person knows all the positions in the left-right direction of the vertical information sections X1 to X5, it is possible to specify printing information only by confirming whether or not holes are formed in the vertical information sections X1 to X5. On the other hand, when the person does not grasp the horizontal position of the vertical information sections X1 to X5, the position can be identified visually as follows.

  First, a person can narrow down the arrangement positions of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 using the locking hole 820 as an index. As described above, the right end portion of the locking hole 820 is positioned at least on the upstream side (that is, the right side) in the tape transport direction with respect to the longitudinal information section X1. A person can narrow the range in which the vertical information section X1 may be arranged in the arm front wall 35 to the downstream side (that is, the left side) in the tape transport direction from the right end portion of the locking hole 820. . Furthermore, the right end portion of the locking hole 820 is located on the upstream side in the tape transport direction with respect to all the vertical information sections X1 to X5. A person can narrow the range in which the vertical information sections X1 to X5 may be arranged to the left of the right end of the locking hole 820.

  The person can specify the position of the vertical information section X1 as follows. First, the vertical information sections X <b> 1 to X <b> 5 are arranged at an interval from the discharge port 341 of the arm part 34. If the person knows in advance the separation distance from the discharge port 341 to the vertical information section X1, the position of the vertical information section X1 in the left-right direction can be specified based on the discharge port 341. Second, at least a part of the vertical information section X1 is within the range LW1. Third, at least a part of the vertical information section X1 is in the range LW2. In this way, the position in the left-right direction of the vertical information section X1 can be specified with reference to the part of the discharge port 341 or the center line C that can be easily grasped visually.

  The longitudinal information sections X1 to X5 are arranged at equal intervals from the left side to the right side when viewed from the front on the arm front wall 35. A person has an arrangement interval of adjacent vertical information areas in the vertical information areas X1 to X5 or a distance between center lines in the horizontal direction of the adjacent vertical information areas within a range of 7 to 10% of the tape exposure length L0. If it is known in advance, the horizontal position of the other vertical information sections X2 to X5 can be specified with the vertical information section X1 as a reference.

  Further, as in the example of FIG. 38, when the printing information is specified based on whether or not the holes are formed in the index portions 800A to 800E, it is also necessary to specify the positions of the index portions 800A to 800E. If the person knows all the vertical positions where the horizontal information areas Y1 to Y3 are arranged, the vertical positions of the indicator portions 800A to 800E in the vertical information areas X1 to X5 are changed to the horizontal information areas Y1 to Y3. It can be specified as a standard. That is, a person can visually identify the specified positions (the left-right direction position and the up-down direction position) of the indicator portions 800A to 800E provided in the overlapping area of the vertical information areas X1 to X5 and the horizontal information areas Y1 to Y3.

  The upper end portion of the locking hole 820 is located above any of the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 within the range of the height dimension of the arm front wall 35. Even if the person does not grasp the vertical position of the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3, the range in which the lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 may be arranged is below the upper end of the locking hole 820. You can narrow down to the side.

  The lateral information sections Y1 and Y2 are arranged in the common indicator portion 831. The predetermined height T1 of the common indicator portion 831 is slightly larger than the width T of the common portion 32. A person can specify the range of the common indicator portion 831 with the common portion 32 as a reference. In the wide cassette 30, the lateral information section Y3 extends in the left-right direction across the common indicator portion 831 and the lower extension portion 832. The narrow cassette 30 extends along the lower end of the arm front wall 35. Therefore, the person can easily specify the position of the lateral information section Y3.

  The lateral information sections Y1 to Y3 are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the vertical direction in the second region R2. Even if the person does not grasp all the vertical positions of the lateral information areas Y1 to Y3, the lateral information area Y1 based on the part that can be easily grasped visually, such as the center line N of the cassette case 31 or the common part 32. , Y2 can be specified.

  As described above, the tape cassette 30 according to the present embodiment enables the person to identify the specified positions of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 and the index portions 800A to 800E of the arm index portion 800 by visually observing the arm front wall 35. It is configured.

  Next, description will be made regarding the specification of the printing information based on the combination of whether or not holes are formed in each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 of the arm index portion 800 or the index portions 800A to 800E. There are various elements in the printing information. In this embodiment, an example in which three elements of the tape width, the printing mode, and the color table are specified will be described.

  Elements of printing information specified by the vertical information sections X1 to X5 are determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the vertical information areas X1, X2, and X5 are defined as areas indicating information for specifying the tape width. The vertical information area X3 is defined as an area indicating information for specifying a printing mode. The vertical information area X4 is defined as an area indicating information for specifying the color table.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 38, when a specific overlapping area in the vertical information sections X1 to X5 functions as the index portions 800A to 800E, the vertical information sections X1 to X5 provided with the index portions 800A to 800E Accordingly, the elements of the printing information that are respectively specified by the indicator portions 800A to 800E are determined. In the present embodiment, the index portions 800A, 800B, and 800E are index portions that specify the tape width. The indicator portion 800C is an indicator portion that specifies a printing mode. The index part 800D is an index part for specifying a color table.

  The vertical information sections X1, X2, and X5 and the indicator portions 800A, 800B, and 800E each function as a tape width specifying portion. The vertical information section X3 and the indicator portion 800C each function as a print mode specifying portion. The vertical information section X4 and the index part 800D each function as a color table specifying part. The tape cassette 30 can specify the element of the printing information corresponding only to each specific part irrespective of the structure of another specific part. Hereinafter, a method for specifying printing information by the index parts 800A to 800E will be described as an example.

With reference to Tables 1 to 3, printing information (tape width, printing mode, and color table) specified by each specifying unit will be described. For convenience, the case where holes are formed in the index portions 800A to 800E is indicated by “0” in the table. A case where no hole is formed in the indicator portions 800A to 800E (that is, a surface portion) is indicated by “1”. In addition, when printing information is specified by whether or not holes are formed in each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5, the index portions 800A to 800E in Tables 1 to 3 are respectively set to the vertical information sections X1 to X1. By replacing with X5, the printing information can be specified in the same manner as described below.

  As shown in Table 1, seven types from 3.5 mm to 36 mm corresponding to combinations of whether the indicator portions 800A, 800B, and 800E constituting the tape width specifying portion are holes or face portions, respectively. The tape width is determined. A person can recognize the tape width of the tape cassette 30 only by visually observing the index portions 800A, 800B, and 800E existing in the vertical information sections X1, X2, and X5 in the arm index portion 800, respectively.

  As shown in Table 1, the index portion 800E is defined as a surface portion when the tape width is a predetermined width (18 mm) or more. When the tape width is less than the predetermined width, it is defined as a hole. A person can recognize whether or not the tape width is equal to or larger than the predetermined width (18 mm) by merely specifying the position of the index portion 800E by visual inspection and confirming whether or not the hole portion is provided there.

  Furthermore, the person can specify the magnitude relation of the tape width within each range where the tape width is equal to or greater than the predetermined width (18 mm) or less than the predetermined value based on the index portions 800A and 800B. Specifically, when the index portions 800A and 800B are a hole portion and a surface portion (a combination of “0, 1” in Table 1), the tape width is the maximum within a range that is greater than or equal to a predetermined width or less than a predetermined value. The tape width (36 mm or 12 mm in Table 1) is shown.

  When the index portions 800A and 800B are a surface portion and a hole portion (a combination of “1 and 0” in Table 1), the tape width is the second largest tape width within each range of the predetermined width or more or less than the predetermined value (table 1 indicates 24 mm or 9 mm). When both index parts 800A and 800B are holes (a combination of “0, 0” in the table), the tape width is the third largest tape width (table 1 indicates 6 mm or 18 mm). In addition, when both index parts 800A and 800B are surface parts (a combination of “1, 1” in the table), the smallest tape width (3.5 mm in Table 1) is indicated.

  A person visually identifies the positions of the index portions 800A, 800B, and 800E, confirms whether or not a hole is formed in the index portion 800E, and the tape width is greater than or less than a predetermined width. Can be determined. Furthermore, a person can identify a more detailed tape width by confirming whether or not a hole is formed in each of the index portions 800A and 800B. For example, in the wide cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the indicator portion 800E is a surface portion, the indicator portion 800A is a hole portion, and the indicator portion 800B is a surface portion. In this case, the person can visually identify the arm index portion 800 and specify that the tape width is equal to or larger than the predetermined width of 18 mm and is the maximum width, that is, “36 mm”.

  If the numerical value of the predetermined width is recognized, a person can determine whether or not the tape width of the tape cassette 30 is less than the predetermined width by simply looking at the entire tape cassette 30. Therefore, the longitudinal information sections X1 and X2 may be defined as the tape width specifying portion included in the arm index portion 800, or two index portions 800A and 800B may be arranged. In this case, a person can view the width of the tape discharged from the discharge port 341 to the exposed portion 77 and the longitudinal information sections X1 and X2 adjacent to the discharge port 341 at the same time. A person can accurately collate the width of the tape exposed at the exposed portion 77 with the tape width indicated by the tape width specifying portion.

  On the other hand, when the tape width specifying portion includes vertical information areas other than the vertical information areas X1 and X2, the vertical information area preferably indicates whether or not the tape width is less than a predetermined width. In the present embodiment, the vertical information section X5 includes either a hole or a surface depending on whether or not the tape width is less than a predetermined width. A person can specify whether the tape width is less than the predetermined width by checking whether the vertical information section X5 is a hole or a surface. Further, the vertical information section X5 is provided at a position separated from the vertical information sections X1 and X2. A person can accurately determine whether the tape width is less than the predetermined width or greater than the predetermined width without confusing the vertical information section X5 with the vertical information sections X1, X2.

  As shown in Table 2, depending on whether the indicator portion 800C constituting the printing mode specifying portion is a hole or a surface portion, the printing mode is mirror image printing (laminate) or normal image printing (receptor). It is determined which one. Specifically, when the index portion 800C is a hole (“0” in the table), it is determined that the printing mode is a laminate. When the indicator portion 800C is a surface portion (“1” in the table), it is determined that the printing mode is a receptor.

  A person can recognize the printing mode of the tape cassette 30 only by visually observing the index portion 800C existing in the vertical information section X3 in the arm index portion 800. More specifically, a person can determine whether the printing mode is a laminate or a receptor simply by visually identifying the position of the index portion 800C and confirming whether or not a hole is formed therein. For example, in the wide cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the indicator portion 800C is a hole. In this case, a person can visually identify the arm index portion 800 and specify that the printing mode is “laminate”.

  "Receptor" of the printing mode includes all printing types of the type that does not perform mirror image printing in addition to the receptor type that transfers the ink ribbon ink to the tape and the thermal type that develops color with the thermal tape without using the ink ribbon. . Therefore, by specifying the printing mode, a person can specify a normal image printing tape cassette 30 (or a cassette case 31 prepared for normal image printing in the manufacturing process) and a mirror image printing tape cassette 30 (or manufacturing). In the process, it can be specified which one of the cassette cases 31) prepared for mirror image printing.

  As shown in Table 3, the color used when the tape printer 1 specifies color information corresponding to whether the index portion 800D constituting the color table specifying portion is a hole or a surface portion. An information table 520 (see FIG. 44) is defined. Specifically, it is defined that the second color table is used when the index portion 800D is a surface portion (“1” in the table). When the index portion 800D is a hole (“0” in the table), it is defined that the first color table is used.

  A person can recognize the color table used when specifying color information simply by looking at the index part 800D existing in the vertical information area X4 in the arm index part 800. Specifically, a person can specify either the first color table or the second color table simply by visually identifying the position of the index portion 800D and confirming whether or not a hole is formed therein. Can be determined. For example, in the wide cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the index portion 800D is a hole. In this case, the person can visually identify the arm index portion 800 and specify that the “first color table” is used when specifying the color information. Details of the color information table 520 will be described later.

  The tape width and the printing mode are important information for executing proper printing in the tape printer 1. Therefore, the arm index part 800 may include a tape width specifying part or a printing mode specifying part alone, or may include both a tape width specifying part and a printing mode specifying part. On the other hand, the arm index unit 800 may not include a color table specifying unit. Further, the vertical information section X4 or the index portion 800D may specify other elements of the tape type (for example, whether the character color is black or other than black) instead of the color table.

  The tape width, the printing mode, and the content of the color table specified by the arm index unit 800 are not limited to Tables 1 to 3, but can be changed as appropriate. Although the total number of combinations of the tape width, the printing mode, and the color table specified in Tables 1 to 3 is 28, it is not necessary to use all of them. For example, as will be described later, when the tape printer 1 detects an inappropriate mounting state of the tape cassette 30, a combination corresponding to the inappropriate mounting state is not used.

  So far, the configuration for the arm index part 800 to specify the printing information and the method for the person to identify the printing information by visually observing the arm index part 800 have been described. In the following, the configuration of the arm index unit 800 viewed from the relationship with the arm detection switch 210 and the specific mode of printing information by the tape printer 1 will be described.

  First, the configuration of the arm index unit 800 viewed in relation to the arm detection switch 210 will be described. As described above, the tape printer 1 of the present embodiment has the five arm detection switches 210A to 210E (see FIG. 11). In the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the overlapping areas facing the arm detection switches 210A to 210E are index portions 800A to 800E (see FIG. 38). In the example of the wide cassette 30 shown in FIG. 38, the indicator portions 800A, 800C, and 800D are holes, and the indicator portions 800B and 800E are surface portions.

  The hole functions as a non-pressing portion 801 that does not press the switch terminal 222 (see FIG. 12) when facing the arm detection switch 210. The non-pressing portion 801 has an opening shape having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, corresponding to the shape of the index portion (overlapping region). The non-pressing portion 801 is, for example, a hole that penetrates the arm front wall 35 substantially perpendicularly to the arm front wall 35 (that is, parallel to the top surface 301 and the bottom surface 302). The formation direction of the non-pressing portion 801 is substantially orthogonal to the tape travel path in the arm portion 34. The arm detection switch 210 facing the non-pressing portion 801 is turned off when the switch terminal 222 is inserted into the non-pressing portion 801.

  The surface portion functions as a pressing portion 802 that presses the switch terminal 222 when facing the arm detection switch 210. The pressing portion 802 is a part of the arm front wall 35 and has a vertically long rectangular surface shape in front view corresponding to the shape of the index portion (overlapping region). The arm detection switch 210 facing the pressing portion 802 is turned on when the switch terminal 222 contacts the pressing portion 802. In the example of the wide cassette 30 shown in FIG. 38, the indicator portions 800A, 800C, and 800D are non-pressing portions 801, and the indicator portions 800B and 800E are pressing portions 802.

  The indicator portion 800E is provided in the lateral information area Y3. As described above, in the wide cassette 30, the lateral information section Y <b> 3 is provided across the common indicator portion 831 and the lower extension portion 832. In the narrow cassette 30, a lateral information section Y <b> 3 is provided along the lower end portion of the arm front wall 35. The vertical length of the index portion 800E in the narrow cassette 30 is about 1/3 compared to the vertical length of the index portion 800E in the wide cassette 30 (see FIG. 39).

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the wide cassette 30, the index portion 800E is a surface portion, that is, a pressing portion 802. In the case of the narrow cassette 30, the indicator portion 800E is a hole, that is, a non-pressing portion 801. This is due to the following reason. When the tape printer 1 is a dedicated machine in which only the narrow cassette 30 is used, the arm detection switch 210E is not necessary at a position facing the index portion 800E. On the other hand, when the tape printer 1 is a general-purpose machine that can share the narrow cassette 30 and the wide cassette 30, an arm detection switch 210E that faces the index portion 800E is necessary. Therefore, the index portion 800E of the narrow cassette 30 functions as an escape hole for preventing the arm detection switch 210E from being pressed when the narrow cassette 30 is mounted on a general-purpose machine.

  As described above, in the indicator portions 800A to 800E, either a hole (non-pressing portion 801) or a surface portion (pressing portion 802) is formed in a specified pattern according to the printing information (Tables 1 to 3). reference). The tape printer 1 can specify the printing information based on the combination of the on / off state of the arm detection switch 210 that is selectively pressed by the arm index unit 800.

  Specifically, the tape printer 1 identifies printing information corresponding to a combination of on / off of the five arm detection switches 210A to 210E with reference to a table. In this table, a predetermined pattern (combination of hole and face) determined in advance for the indicator portions 800A to 800E is replaced with a detection pattern (combination of an off state and an on state) of the corresponding arm detection switches 210A to 210E, respectively. And associated with the printing information.

  A print information table 510 shown in FIG. 40 is an example of a table used for specifying print information by the tape printer 1. The print information table 510 is stored in the ROM 602 (see FIG. 14). In the example illustrated in FIG. 40, the arm detection switches 210A to 210E correspond to the switches “SW1” to “SW5”, respectively. The OFF state (OFF) and the ON state (ON) of each arm detection switch 210 correspond to “0” and “1”, respectively.

  When a total of five arm detection switches 210A to 210E are used, a maximum of 32 pieces of printing information can be specified corresponding to a maximum of 32 detection patterns, which is the total number of combinations in the on / off state. In the example shown in FIG. 40, printing information corresponding to 24 detection patterns among the maximum 32 detection patterns is set. Of the remaining eight detection patterns, three detection patterns indicating “error” are used to detect a state in which the tape cassette 30 is not mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8. In the other five detection patterns, “reserved” indicating a blank is set. The mounting state of the tape cassette 30 when an error is detected will be described later.

  The printing information table 510 used in the tape printer 1 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, a print information table 510 in which any other tape type is added to the detection pattern corresponding to “reserved” can be used. A printing information table 510 in which the registered tape type is deleted, the correspondence between each detection pattern and the tape type is changed, or the content of the tape type corresponding to each detection pattern is changed may be used. In this case, the prescribed pattern determined for the above-mentioned visual tape type specification is also changed as appropriate.

  As described above, for example, when the indicator portions 800E and 800D are not provided, the corresponding arm detection switches 210E (SW5) and 210D (SW4) are not used. In this case, only the printing information corresponding to the arm detection switches 210A to 210C (SW1 to SW3) needs to be defined in the printing information table 510.

  As described above, the tape cassette 30 of the present embodiment is configured so that the person and the tape printer 1 can specify the tape type (specifically, information for printing) based on the arm index unit 800. Yes. By enabling a person to visually recognize the arm index portion 800 and recognize the tape type, the following effects can be obtained.

  In a conventional tape cassette manufacturing method, an operator generally stores a tape in a cassette case having a height corresponding to the tape width (so-called case size). On the other hand, a tape cassette manufacturing method has been proposed in which a plurality of types of tapes having different tape widths are stored in cassette cases having a common case size. As described above, according to the method for manufacturing a tape cassette having a common case size, the following effects can be expected.

  First, when transporting cassette cases with different case sizes corresponding to various tape widths from a parts manufacturing factory to an assembly factory, the cassette cases are transported using different transport containers for each case size. It was. By sharing the case size, it is possible to share the transport container used when the cassette case is transported, thereby reducing the transport cost of the cassette case.

  Second, if the case size is different for each tape width, it is necessary to use a different packaging box for each case size when shipping the product from the assembly factory. By sharing the case size, the packaging box for product shipment, the packaging form at the time of product shipment, and the like can be made common, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Third, since the ink ribbon has a lower physical durability than the tape, using an ink ribbon of the same width for a tape with a small tape width may cause the ink ribbon to be cut during the printing operation. is there. By sharing the case size that can secure a sufficient ribbon width, a sufficient ribbon width can be ensured even when the tape width is small. Therefore, even when the tape width is small, cutting of the ink ribbon during the printing operation can be suppressed.

  Conventionally, when tapes having different tape widths are stored in a cassette case of a common size, there is a risk that a tape having an incorrect tape width may be stored in the cassette case. For example, a cassette case having a common case size in accordance with a 12 mm tape is set with a rib height so that a 12 mm tape can be accommodated, so that a tape of less than 12 mm can be accommodated. In this case, there is a possibility that an operator mistakenly stores a 6 mm or 9 mm tape in a cassette case that was intended to store a 12 mm tape.

  As described above, there are a receptor type and a laminate type in the tape cassette printing mode. If the case size is made common, the external shape of the cassette case will be the same. Therefore, conventionally, there is a possibility that a tape that does not correspond to the planned printing mode is stored in the cassette case. For example, this is a case where an operator puts an erroneous thermal paper tape in a cassette case scheduled to be a laminate type.

  For this reason, the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process includes an inspection process for confirming whether the tape and ink ribbon stored in the manufactured tape cassette correspond to the planned tape width and printing mode. It was out.

  According to the tape cassette 30 of this embodiment, the person can recognize the tape type of the tape cassette 30 only by visually observing the arm index portion 800. That is, the tape width of the tape to be stored in the cassette case 31 and the printing mode intended for the cassette case 31 can be grasped. Therefore, in the manufacturing process of the tape cassette 30, the operator can work while confirming the contents to be mounted on the cassette case 31, so that manufacturing errors of the tape cassette 30 can be reduced. As a result, the burden on the worker who performs the inspection process as described above can be reduced.

  Further, in the manufacturing process of the tape cassette 30, an operator stores the tape in the lower case 312 and inserts a part of the tape into the arm portion 34. The operator attaches a part of the tape inserted into the arm part 34 to a position where the part is properly regulated by the restriction parts (the separation wall restriction part 383, the first tape lower restriction part 381B, etc.) in the arm part 34. .

  As described above, the person can view the separation wall restricting portion 383, the first tape lower restricting portion 381B, and the arm indicator portion 800 simultaneously from the front of the lower case 312. Therefore, the operator can confirm whether or not the tape regulated in the width direction in the arm portion 34 corresponds to the tape type indicated by the arm index portion 800 by viewing the lower arm front wall 35B from the front. . Therefore, the operator can easily find out that the wrong type of tape is stored in the tape cassette 30. As a result, the manufacturing mistake of the tape cassette 30 can be suppressed.

  When the tape cassette 30 is shipped, the inspector can visually check the arm index portion 800 to check whether the contents mounted on the cassette case 31 are correct. Specifically, it is possible to inspect whether or not the tape exposed from the exposed portion 77 of the manufactured tape cassette 30 matches the tape type that can be read from the arm index portion 800.

  In particular, the arm index portion 800 of the present embodiment is provided on the arm front wall 35 adjacent to the exposed portion 77 where the tape is exposed. Therefore, the person can see the arm index portion 800 and the tape from the same direction (specifically, in front of the tape cassette 30). The inspector can collate the tape type indicated by the arm index portion 800 with the tape exposed at the exposed portion 77. Therefore, the workability of the product inspection of the tape cassette 30 can be improved.

  The arm index portion 800 has a simple configuration of a combination of a hole and a surface portion (that is, a combination of a non-pressing portion 801 and a pressing portion 802) provided in each of the vertical information sections X1 to X5 (index portions 800A to 800E). It is. At the time of manufacturing the tape cassette 30, it is easy to form the arm index portion 800 in the cassette case 31. Therefore, there is no need to print on the cassette case 31 indicating the mounting contents or stick a label indicating the mounting contents. Therefore, manufacturing mistakes of the tape cassette 30 can be suppressed at a low cost.

  In the present embodiment, a hole functioning as the locking hole 820 is provided in the first region R1. Holes (that is, non-pressing portions 801) or surface portions (that is, pressing portions 802) corresponding to the tape type are provided in the overlapping regions that function as the index portions 800A to 800E in the second region R2. . However, the hole and the surface can be freely formed in the specific region R0 as long as the functions as the locking hole 820 and the indicator portions 800A to 800E are ensured.

  Specifically, in the above-described tape cassette 30 (see FIGS. 37 to 39), all of the regions that do not function as the locking holes 820 and the indicator portions 800A to 800E in the specific region R0 are flush with the pressing portion 802. It is. Therefore, although the holes (non-pressing part 801 and locking hole 820) provided in the specific region R0 are all independent, it is not necessary that all the holes are independent.

  For example, in the specific region R0, one hole (groove) having a size and shape that includes at least two of the plurality of non-pressing portions 801 may be formed. One groove portion including the locking hole 820 and the non-pressing portion 801 may be formed. One groove portion including at least two of the plurality of non-pressing portions 801 and the locking hole 820 may be formed. In the case of forming one groove portion, it is preferable not to include a portion that functions as the pressing portion 802.

  In the present embodiment, the arm indicator portion 800 and the locking hole 820 are provided in the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B among the arm front walls 35. Thereby, compared with the case where the arm index part 800 and the locking hole 820 are provided in separate members (for example, the upper arm front wall 35A and the lower arm front wall 35B), the arm index part 800 and the locking hole 820 are provided. The positional relationship can be defined more accurately. As a result, it is possible to specify the tape type more accurately regardless of whether the person visually identifies the tape type or the tape printer 1 uses the arm detection unit 200 to specify the tape type.

  Below, with reference to FIGS. 41-44, the detailed structure and function of 360 A of back level | step difference walls which the back recessed part 360 has are demonstrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the rear step wall 360 </ b> A includes a rear indicator portion 900. The rear indicator 900 includes at least one hole and indicates the tape type of the tape cassette 30. A person can identify the tape type by viewing the rear indicator 900. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting unit 8, the tape printer 1 can identify the tape type by detecting information indicated by the rear index unit 900 by the rear detection unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, the tape type specified by the rear index unit 900 is color information regarding the tape stored in the tape cassette 30. Hereinafter, the area | region which 360 A of back level | step difference walls have and the structure in the area | region are demonstrated.

  The rear step wall 360A includes a specific region F0 that is a region extending forward from the rear wall 370. That is, the specific area F0 is an area adjacent to the rear wall 370 in the rear stepped wall 360A. In the present embodiment, the entire rear step wall 360A is the specific region F0. The specific area F0 includes a vertical information section V and a horizontal information section W. The vertical information section V is a plurality of strip-shaped sections extending along the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 41) which is the short direction of the cassette case 31. The lateral information section W is a plurality of strip-shaped sections extending along the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 41) that is the longitudinal direction of the cassette case 31.

  The vertical information section V of the present embodiment includes four vertical information sections V1 to V4. The vertical information sections V <b> 1 to V <b> 4 are arranged at equal intervals in the left-right direction of the cassette case 31. The vertical information section V1 is located on the rightmost side (left side in FIG. 41) among the vertical information sections V1 to V4. Vertical information sections V2, V3, and V4 are sequentially provided from the vertical information section V1 toward the left side (right side in FIG. 41). The vertical lengths of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 (that is, the length in the left-right direction) are substantially equal, and adjacent vertical information sections in the vertical information sections V1 to V4 are adjacent to each other at equal intervals.

  The longitudinal information section V3 includes a portion (contact point P shown in FIG. 20) where the outer edges of the first lower tape region 400B and the second lower tape region 410B are adjacent in a plan view. In other words, the vertical information section V3 includes a virtual line (hereinafter referred to as a reference line Z) along the front-rear direction passing on the contact P. In the present embodiment, the reference line Z is located slightly to the left (to the right in FIG. 41) from the approximate center position in the left-right direction of the vertical information section V3.

  The lateral information section W of the present embodiment includes two lateral information sections W1 and W2. The lateral information sections W1 and W2 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 41) of the cassette case 31. The lateral information section W1 is provided adjacent to the rear wall 370 in the specific area F0. The lateral information section W2 is provided in front of the lateral information section W1 (downward in FIG. 41) in the specific area F0. The width lengths (that is, the lengths in the front-rear direction) of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 are substantially equal.

  The specific area F <b> 0 is an area facing the rear detection switch 310 when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8. In the specific area F0, a rear indicator section 900 including the lateral information sections W1 and W2 is provided. A hole is formed in at least one of the lateral information sections W1 and W2. Whether or not a hole is formed in each of the lateral information sections W1 and W is determined in advance according to color information. The rear indicator 900 identifies the color information by a combination of whether or not a hole is formed in each of the lateral information sections W1 and W2. A person can recognize the color information by viewing the combination of the holes formed in the lateral information sections W1 and W2.

  The position where the hole is formed in the left-right direction of the lateral information sections W1, W2 may be determined for each of the lateral information sections W1, W2. For example, among the plurality of regions where the horizontal information sections W1 and W2 and the vertical information sections V1 to V4 intersect and overlap (hereinafter referred to as overlapping regions), at least one overlapping region is indicated for each of the horizontal information sections W1 and W2. Set as a division. The rear indicator portion 900 may specify color information depending on a combination of whether or not a hole is formed in the indicator portion. In this case, if the position corresponding to the rear detection switch 310 (see FIG. 13) is determined as the indicator, the tape printer 1 can also specify the color information.

  In the present embodiment, when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the five overlapping areas facing the five rear detection switches 310A to 310E (see FIG. 13) are the indicator portions 900A to 900E. Function. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, a region where the horizontal information section W1 and the vertical information section V1 intersect and overlap functions as an indicator portion 900A facing the rear detection switch 310A.

  A region where the horizontal information section W1 and the vertical information section V2 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 900B facing the rear detection switch 310B. A region where the horizontal information section W1 and the vertical information section V3 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 900C facing the rear detection switch 310C. A region where the horizontal information section W1 and the vertical information section V4 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 900D facing the rear detection switch 310D. A region where the horizontal information section W2 and the vertical information section V3 intersect and overlap functions as the indicator portion 900E facing the rear detection switch 310E.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41, holes are formed in the indicator portions 900A and 900E. The indicator portions 900B, 900C, and 900D are part of the surface portion included in the rear stepped wall 360A in which no hole is formed. Thus, each of the indicator portions 900A to 900E is configured by a hole or a surface portion that can be identified by human eyes. Furthermore, these hole portions and surface portions function as a non-pressing portion 901 and a pressing portion 902 described later, respectively. The relationship between the indicator units 900A to 900E and the rear detection switch 310 will be described in detail later.

  In the present embodiment, the specific region F0 (that is, the rear step wall 360A) has a substantially triangular shape in plan view, and the length in the front-rear direction on the reference line Z is the largest. That is, the longitudinal information section V3 including the reference line Z among the longitudinal information sections V1 to V4 has the longest length in the front-rear direction in the specific area F0. Therefore, one index part is provided for each of the vertical information sections V1, V2, and V4, and a plurality of index parts are provided for the vertical information section V3. As described above, when a plurality of indicator portions are arranged in the front-rear direction in the specific area F0, it is preferable to arrange them in the vertical information section having a large length in the front-rear direction in the specific area F0.

  With the configuration described above, a person can easily recognize the identification elements (holes or surface portions) formed in the lateral information sections W1 and W2 or the indicator portions 900A to 900E by visually observing the rear stepped wall 360A. Hereinafter, the reason will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42 show the rear step wall 360A (specific region F0) of the present embodiment. FIG. 43 shows a comparative example in which the hole formation pattern is changed in the rear step wall 360A (specific region F0).

  The following two patterns are assumed as a mode in which a person visually observes the rear indicator portion 900. First, the person visually observes the rear stepped wall 360 </ b> A from the inside of the lower case 312. In this aspect, the person views the lower case 312 before the upper case 311 is assembled from above. Thereby, the person can visually observe the rear indicator portion 900 from the upper surface side of the rear step wall 360A.

  Second, it is a mode in which a person views the rear indicator portion 900 from the outside of the lower case 312. In this aspect, the person views the lower case 312 from below. At this time, the lower case 312 may be assembled with the upper case 311 or may not be assembled with the upper case 311. Thereby, the person can visually observe the rear indicator portion 900 from the lower surface side of the rear stepped wall 360A.

  When the person knows all the positions of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 in the front-rear direction, the identification elements of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 can be visually identified. On the other hand, when the person does not grasp the front-rear direction position of the lateral information sections W1, W2, the identification elements of the lateral information sections W1, W2 are specified as follows according to the aspect in which the rear indicator portion 900 is visually observed. it can.

  First, element identification of the lateral information section W1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, when viewing the rear indicator portion 900 from the inside of the lower case 312, a person can specify an area extending in the left-right direction adjacent to the rear wall 370 as the lateral information section W <b> 1. Furthermore, the hole formed adjacent to the rear wall 370 can be specified as the hole provided in the lateral information section W1. Of the region adjacent to the rear wall 370, the portion where the hole is not formed can be specified as the surface portion provided in the lateral information section W1.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41, when viewing the rear indicator portion 900 from the outside of the lower case 312, a person cannot directly view the rear wall 370. However, since the thickness (length in the front-rear direction) of the rear wall 370 is small, a person can regard the rear end edge of the lower case 312 as the rear wall 370 when viewed from the bottom. Therefore, the person can specify the area extending in the left-right direction adjacent to the contour line on the back side of the tape cassette 30 as the lateral information section W1. Moreover, the hole part and surface part which were provided in the horizontal information area W1 can be specified similarly to the above.

  Next, element specification of the lateral information section W2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, when viewing the rear indicator portion 900 from the inside of the lower case 312, a person can recognize the first lower tape region 400B and the second lower tape region 410B. Using the first lower tape region 400B and the second lower tape region 410B as a reference, a person can recognize the reference line Z passing through the contact point P (see FIG. 20). With reference to the reference line Z, the elements of the lateral information area W2 can be specified as follows.

  First, the person uses the hole located closest to the reference line Z among the holes formed adjacent to the rear wall 370 (that is, the holes provided in the lateral information section W1) as a reference. Identified as a hole. However, when there is a hole (a hole provided in the vertical information area V3 shown in FIG. 41) that overlaps the reference line Z in plan view, the reference line Z is excluded except for the hole on the reference line Z. The hole located at the closest position is specified as the reference hole. The human specifies the end portion that is the farthest from the reference line Z in the reference hole portion as the reference end portion. The person specifies the length in the left-right direction between the reference line Z and the reference end as the distance D1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 42, the hole formed in the index portion 900A located at the right end among the index portions of the lateral information section W1 corresponds to the reference hole portion. The right end portion of the hole formed in the indicator portion 900A corresponds to the reference end portion. Therefore, the length in the left-right direction from the right end of the hole formed in the index portion 900A to the reference line Z is obtained as the distance D1.

  The distance D0 (see FIG. 41) indicates the length in the front-rear direction between the rear wall 370 and the lateral information section W2. The position in the front-rear direction of the lateral information section W2 is defined so that the distance D0 is less than twice the distance D1 (see FIG. 42). In other words, in the rear stepped wall 360A, at least a part of the lateral information section W2 is within a range that extends forward from the rear wall 370 to twice the distance D1 (in the range of distance D2 in FIG. 42, D2 = D1 * 2). included.

  From the above, the person can specify that there is at least a part of the lateral information section W2 located in front of the lateral information section W1 within the range of the distance D2. In the case where a hole portion separated from the rear wall 370 is formed within the range of the distance D2 (that is, a hole portion provided outside the range of the lateral information area W1), the person moves the hole to the lateral information area. It can be specified as a hole provided in W2. In particular, when only one indicator is provided in the lateral information area W2, whether or not a hole is provided in the lateral information area W2 even if the person does not clearly grasp the position of the indicator. Can be identified.

  According to the above method, the distance D1, and thus the distance D2, differs depending on the position where the reference hole is formed. When a hole is provided in the index portion (the index portion 900A in FIG. 42) located farthest from the reference line Z, and the hole is specified as the reference hole, the distances D1 and D2 are the largest. Become. When a hole is provided in the index part (index part 900D in FIG. 43) located closest to the reference line Z, and the hole is specified as the reference hole, the distances D1 and D2 are the smallest. Become.

  When a plurality of holes are formed in the lateral information area W1 as in the example shown in FIG. 43, the hole closer to the reference line Z (that is, the hole of the indicator portion 900D) is the reference. Corresponds to the hole. In this case, the distances D1 and D2 are smaller than when the hole portion that is separated from the reference line Z (that is, the hole portion of the indicator portion 900A) is used as the reference hole portion. Thus, when at least one hole is provided in the lateral information section W1, a person can specify the range of the distance D2 regardless of the number and position of the holes provided in the lateral information section W1. .

  On the other hand, when viewing the rear index portion 900 from the outside of the lower case 312 (see FIG. 41), a person cannot directly view the first lower tape area 400B and the second lower tape area 410B. Therefore, it may be difficult for a person to recognize the contact point P (see FIG. 20) or the reference line Z. In this case, it is possible to specify the element of the lateral information section W2 by the following method.

  The rear index unit 900 of the present embodiment corresponds to color information (for example, tape color: Clear, character color: Black, etc.) relating to a main tape that is stored in the tape cassette 30 in a large proportion. Of the two indicator portions provided in W1 and W2 and arranged in the front-rear direction, a hole portion is provided in the front indicator portion, and a surface portion is provided in the rear indicator portion. Specifically, the two indicator portions 900C and 900E through which the reference line Z passes are each configured by a combination of a surface portion and a hole portion.

  As a result, in many tape cassettes 30, the indicator portion constituted by the surface portion close to the rear wall 370 and the indicator portion constituted by the hole portion separated from the rear wall 370 are arranged in the front-rear direction. When the person visually observes the rear indicator portion 900 from below, the person can specify the hole portion separated from the rear wall 370 as the hole portion provided in the lateral information section W2. The surface portion provided on the rear side of the hole portion can be specified as the surface portion provided in the lateral information section W1. Furthermore, the person can specify the position of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 based on the specified surface portion and hole portion.

  Conversely, of the two indicator portions provided in the lateral information sections W1 and W2 and arranged in the front-rear direction, the rear indicator portion may be a hole and the front indicator portion may be a surface portion. For example, although not shown, two index portions (for example, index portions 900C and 900E) through which the reference line Z passes are configured by a hole portion and a surface portion, respectively. In this case, an indicator portion constituted by a hole portion close to the rear wall 370 and an indicator portion constituted by a surface portion separated from the rear wall 370 are arranged in the front-rear direction. When a person visually observes the rear indicator portion 900 from below, the person can specify the hole portion close to the rear wall 370 as the hole portion provided in the lateral information section W1. The surface portion provided on the front side of the hole portion can be specified as the surface portion provided in the lateral information section W2. Furthermore, the person can specify the position of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 based on the specified hole and face.

  The rear indicator portion 900 of this embodiment can recognize the formation pattern of the hole and the surface portion from above. Therefore, even when the rear index portion 900 is viewed from above (see FIG. 42), the hole or the surface portion of the lateral information section W2 can be specified in the same manner as described above.

  Furthermore, when the color information is specified by whether or not the holes are formed in the indicator portions 900A to 900E as in the examples of FIGS. 41 and 42, it is also necessary to specify the positions of the indicator portions 900A to 900E. Become. If the person knows all the horizontal positions where the vertical information sections V1 to V4 are arranged, the horizontal positions of the indicator portions 900A to 900E in the horizontal information sections W1 and W2 are set to the vertical information sections V1 to V4. It can be specified as a standard. That is, a person can visually identify the specified positions (the left-right direction position and the front-rear direction position) of the indicator portions 900A to 900E provided in the overlapping area between the horizontal information areas W1 and W2 and the vertical information areas V1 to V4.

  The positions of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 in the left-right direction can be specified as follows by a person viewing the rear indicator portion 900. As described above, the reference line Z is included in the vertical information section V3. Therefore, when viewing the rear index portion 900 from above (see FIG. 42), a person can specify the horizontal position of the vertical information section V3 with reference to the reference line Z. The vertical information sections V1 to V4 are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the left-right direction in the specific area F0. Therefore, the person can specify the vertical information sections V2 and V1 sequentially arranged at equal intervals in the right direction and the vertical information section V4 arranged at equal intervals in the left direction on the basis of the vertical information section V3. Thus, even when the horizontal position of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 is not grasped, the person can specify the positions of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 with reference to the reference line Z that can be easily grasped visually.

  As described above, the indicator portions 900C and 900E are configured by a combination of holes and face portions arranged in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the rear index portion 900 is viewed from below (see FIG. 41), the position in the left-right direction of the vertical information section V3 including the index portions 900C and 900E can be specified based on the combination of the hole portion and the surface portion arranged in the front-rear direction. . Therefore, similarly to the above, it is possible to specify the vertical information sections V1 to V4 that are arranged at almost equal intervals in the left-right direction in the specific area F0. Thus, even when the horizontal position of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 is not grasped, the position of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 is determined based on the indicator portion (combination of the hole portion and the surface portion) arranged in the front-rear direction. Can be identified.

  Thereby, it can be specified in which of the vertical information sections V1 to V4 the hole provided in the transverse information section W1 is located in any of the indicator sections 900A to 900D. . Whether or not the hole is provided in the indicator portion 900E can be specified by whether or not the hole provided in the horizontal information section W2 is provided in the vertical information section V3. As described above, the rear indicator portion 900 according to the present embodiment can identify the combination of the hole portion and the surface portion provided in each of the indicator portions 900A to 900E by human eyes.

  Next, identification of color information by a combination of whether or not a hole is formed in each of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 or the indicator portions 900A to 900E will be described. There are various elements in the color information. In the present embodiment, an example in which two elements of the tape color and the character color are specified will be described. The tape color included in the color information indicates the base color of the tape (thermal paper tape 55, print tape 57, double-sided adhesive tape 58). The character color included in the color information indicates the ink color of the ink ribbon 60 if the thermal transfer method using the ink ribbon 60 is used. In the case of the heat sensitive system for developing the color of the thermal paper tape 55, the color that the thermal paper tape 55 develops is shown.

  The elements of the color information specified by the horizontal information sections W1 and W2 are determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the lateral information area W1 is defined as an area indicating information for specifying the tape color. The horizontal information area W2 is defined as an area indicating information for specifying a character color. Further, when a specific overlapping area functions as the indicator portions 900A to 900E in the lateral information sections W1 and W2, the indicator portions 900A to 900E are specified depending on which one of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 corresponds. The element of color information to be determined is determined. In the present embodiment, the indicator portions 900A to 900D are indicator portions that specify the tape color. The indicator portion 900E is an indicator portion that specifies the character color.

  The lateral information section W1 and the indicator portions 900A to 900D each function as a tape color specifying portion. The lateral information section W2 and the indicator portion 900E each function as a character color specifying portion. The tape cassette 30 can specify the element of the corresponding color information only by each specific part regardless of the configuration of other specific parts. Hereinafter, a method for specifying color information by the indicator units 900A to 900E will be described as an example.

  With reference to Tables 4 to 6, the elements of the color information (tape color and character color) specified by each specifying unit will be described. For convenience, the case where holes are formed in the indicator portions 900A to 900E is indicated by “0” in the table. A case where a hole portion is not formed in the indicator portions 900A to 900E and is a surface portion is indicated by “1”.

In addition, when color information is specified by the combination of the hole part and surface part which are formed in horizontal information area W1 and W2, the index part 900B-900D of Table 4 is provided in three holes provided in horizontal information area W1. By substituting with the combination of the surface portions, the main tape color can be specified as in the following description. By replacing the indicator portions 900A to 900D in Table 5 with a combination of four holes and face portions provided in the lateral information section W1, a special tape color can be specified as in the following description. By replacing the indicator portion 900E in Table 6 with one hole portion or surface portion provided in the lateral information section W2, the character color can be specified as in the following description.

  First, a method in which a person visually identifies the tape color of the tape cassette 30 will be described. In the present embodiment, the indicator portions 900A to 900D (indicator portions on the lateral information area W1) indicate the tape color by the combination of the hole portion and the surface portion. In particular, the main tape colors with a large ratio mounted on the tape cassette 30 can be specified by visualizing only the three indicator portions 900B to 900D. Further, some of the special tape colors with a small proportion mounted on the tape cassette 30 can be identified by visually observing the four indicator portions 900A to 900D.

  As shown in Table 4, “Clear”, which is the main tape color, corresponds to the combination of each of the indicator portions 900B to 900D constituting part of the tape color specifying portion being a hole portion or a face portion. ”,“ Blue ”, and“ Black ”are defined. Specifically, when the index portions 900B to 900D are a surface portion, a surface portion, and a hole portion (a combination of “1, 1, 0” in Table 4), the tape color is “Clear”. When the indicator portions 900B to 900D are a hole portion, a surface portion, and a surface portion (a combination of “0, 1, 1” in Table 4), it indicates that the tape color is “Blue”. When the indicator portions 900B to 900D are a hole portion, a hole portion, and a surface portion (a combination of “0, 0, 1” in Table 4), it indicates that the tape color is “Black”.

  A person can recognize the main tape color of the tape cassette 30 only by visually observing the indicator portions 900B to 900D existing in the lateral information section W1 in the rear indicator portion 900. Specifically, a person can visually identify the positions of the indicator portions 900B to 900D, confirm whether or not a hole is formed therein, whether or not the color is a main tape color, and The details of the tape color can be determined. For example, in the tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 43, the indicator portions 900B to 900D are a surface portion, a surface portion, and a hole portion, respectively. In this case, a person can visually identify the rear indicator 900 and specify that the tape color is “Clear”.

  The indicator portion 900C is provided in the vertical information section V3 that can be specified with reference to the reference line Z. Therefore, the indicator portion 900C can be identified most easily by human observation among the indicator portions 900A to 900D on the lateral information section W1. The indicator portions 900B and 900D provided in the vertical information sections V2 and V4 located on the left and right sides of the vertical information section V3 can also be easily identified by human observation. In other words, the main tape color can be specified only by confirming the indicator portions 900B to 900D that are easily recognized by human eyes among the indicator portions 900A to 900D on the lateral information section W1.

  As shown in Table 5, “White”, “Special tape color” corresponding to the combination of whether the indicator portions 900A to 900D constituting the tape color specifying portion are holes or face portions, respectively. Three colors “Yellow” and “Red” are defined. Specifically, when the indicator portions 900A to 900D are a hole portion, a surface portion, a surface portion, and a surface portion (a combination of “0, 1, 1, 1” in Table 5), it indicates that the tape color is “White”. . When the indicator portions 900A to 900D are a surface portion, a hole portion, a surface portion, and a hole portion (a combination of “1, 0, 1, 0” in Table 5), it indicates that the tape color is “Yellow”. When the indicator portions 900A to 900D are a hole portion, a surface portion, a hole portion, and a surface portion (a combination of “0, 1, 0, 1” in Table 5), it indicates that the tape color is “Red”.

  A person can recognize the special tape color of the tape cassette 30 only by visually observing the indicator portions 900A to 900D existing in the lateral information section W1 in the rear indicator portion 900. Specifically, a person can visually identify the positions of the indicator portions 900A to 900D, and confirm whether or not a hole is formed therein, whether or not it is a special tape color, and its The details of the tape color can be determined. For example, in the tape cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, since the indicator portions 900A to 900D are a hole portion, a surface portion, a surface portion, and a surface portion, respectively, it can be specified that the tape color is “White”.

  As shown in Table 6, “Black” or “other than Black” is defined as the character color depending on whether the indicator portion 900E constituting the character color specifying portion is a hole or a surface portion. . Specifically, when the index portion 900E is a hole (“0” in Table 6), it indicates that the character color is “Black”. When the indicator portion 900E is a surface portion (“1” in Table 6), it indicates that the character color is “other than Black”.

  A person can recognize the character color of the tape cassette 30 only by visually observing the indicator portion 900E existing in the lateral information section W2 in the rear indicator portion 900. Specifically, a person can determine whether the character color is black or other than black simply by visually identifying the position of the indicator portion 900E and confirming whether or not a hole is formed there. . For example, in the tape cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 41 to 43, the index portion 900E is a hole. In this case, a person can visually identify the back indicator portion 900 and specify that the character color is “Black”.

  As described above, in the tape cassette 30 of the present embodiment, regardless of whether the indicator portion 900E is a hole portion or a surface portion, the tape can be obtained only by a person visually observing the indicator portions 900B to 900D or the indicator portions 900A to 900D. Can recognize colors. Regardless of whether the indicator portions 900A to 900D are hole portions or face portions, the character color can be recognized only by a person viewing the indicator portion 900E.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the first tape area 400 and the second tape area 410 are provided to be biased toward the rear side in the cassette case 31. The first ribbon area 420 and the second ribbon area 440 are provided to be biased toward the front side in the cassette case 31. In the tape cassette 30 using the ink ribbon 60, the tape and the ink ribbon 60 are arranged in the front-rear direction in the cassette case 31 in accordance with the arrangement order of the lateral information sections W1, W2 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the base information color of the tape located on the rear side of the ink ribbon 60 can be specified by visually observing the horizontal information section W1 indicating the tape color on the rear side of the horizontal information section W2. The ink color of the ink ribbon 60 positioned in front of the tape can be specified by visually observing the horizontal information area W2 indicating the character color in front of the lateral information area W1. Thus, the person can accurately collate the elements of the color information indicated in the lateral information sections W1 and W2 along the arrangement of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 in the cassette case 31.

  In addition, the content of the color information (tape color and character color) specified by each specifying unit is not limited to Tables 4 to 6, and can be appropriately changed. Although the total number of color information combinations defined in Tables 4 to 6 is 28, it is not necessary to use all of them. However, it is preferable that the combination of the hole and the surface corresponding to the color information is defined according to at least the following regularity.

  First, the indicator portions 900A, 900B, and 900D excluding the indicator portion 900C that can be easily specified using the reference line Z as an indicator are combinations in which at least one is constituted by a hole and at least one is constituted by a surface portion. It is preferable. Thereby, the visibility of the combination of the hole part and surface part which were provided in each indicator part 900A-900D can be improved. A person can accurately specify color information when viewing the indicator portions 900A to 900D.

  Secondly, a combination in which all of the indicator portions 900A to 900D existing in the lateral information section W1 become surface portions and a combination in which all of the indicator portions 900A to 900E existing in the specific area F0 become surface portions are not adopted. Is preferred. This is because, in such a combination, the rear stepped wall 360 </ b> A becomes a surface portion in which no hole portion exists or a surface portion in which only one hole portion is formed at a position separated from the rear wall 370. In this case, it is difficult for a person to grasp that the rear indicator portion 900 is provided on the rear step wall 360A. By providing at least one hole at a position adjacent to the rear wall 370, it is possible to clarify that the rear indicator portion 900 is provided on the rear stepped wall 360A.

  Thirdly, the color information of the tape that is frequently stored in the tape cassette 30 is indicated by a combination in which one of the indicator portions 900C and 900E arranged in the front and rear of the rear step wall 360A is a hole portion and the other is a surface portion. It is preferable that As described above, this is because a person can identify the element of the lateral information section W2 by viewing the rear stepped wall 360A.

  Fourth, when a person visually identifies a tape color, it is confirmed whether each of the index portions 900B to 900D is a hole portion or a surface portion, regardless of whether the tape color is main or special. There is a need. Therefore, it is preferable that the detection pattern (see Table 5) of the rear detection unit 300 corresponding to the special tape color does not include the detection pattern (see Table 4) of the rear detection unit 300 corresponding to the main tape color. Thus, when a person visually observes the rear indicator portion 900, the main tape color can be clearly distinguished from other tape colors, and the tape color can be easily specified.

  So far, the configuration for the rear index unit 900 to specify the color information and the method for the person to identify the color information by viewing the rear index unit 900 have been described. Hereinafter, the configuration of the rear indicator unit 900 viewed from the relationship with the rear detection switch 310 and the specific mode of color information by the rear detection switch 310 will be described.

  First, the configuration of the rear index unit 900 viewed from the relationship with the rear detection switch 310 will be described. As described above, the tape printer 1 of the present embodiment includes the five rear detection switches 310A to 310E (see FIG. 13). In the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting unit 8, the overlapping areas facing the rear detection switches 310A to 310E are index units 900A to 900E (see FIG. 41). In the example of the tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 41, the indicator portions 900A and 900E are hole portions, and the indicator portions 900B to 900D are surface portions.

  The hole functions as a non-pressing portion 901 that does not press the switch terminal 317 (see FIG. 13) when facing the rear detection switch 310. The non-pressing portion 901 has a circular opening shape in plan view inscribed in the shape of the index portion (overlapping region). The rear detection switch 310 facing the non-pressing portion 901 is turned off when the switch terminal 317 is inserted into the non-pressing portion 901.

  The surface portion functions as a pressing portion 902 that presses the switch terminal 317 when facing the rear detection switch 310. The pressing portion 902 is a part of the rear stepped wall 360A and has a circular surface shape in plan view that is inscribed in the shape of the index portion (overlapping region). The rear detection switch 310 facing the pressing portion 902 is turned on when the switch terminal 317 contacts the pressing portion 902. In the example of the tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 41, the indicator portions 900A and 900E are non-pressing portions 901, and the indicator portions 900B to 900D are pressing portions 902.

  As described above, in the indicator portions 900A to 900E of the rear indicator portion 900, either a hole (non-pressing portion 901) or a surface portion (pressing portion 902) is formed in a specified pattern according to the color information ( Table 4-6). The tape printer 1 can specify color information based on the combination of the on / off state of the rear detection switch 310 that is selectively pressed by the rear index unit 900.

  Specifically, the tape printer 1 specifies color information corresponding to the combination of the on / off states of the five rear detection switches 310A to 310E with reference to the table. In this table, predetermined patterns (combination of holes and surfaces) predetermined for the indicator portions 900A to 900E are replaced with detection patterns (combination of OFF state and ON state) of the corresponding rear detection switches 310A to 310E, respectively. And associated with the color information.

  A color information table 520 shown in FIG. 44 is an example of a table used for specifying color information by the tape printer 1. The color information table 520 is stored in the ROM 602 (see FIG. 14). In the example shown in FIG. 44, the rear detection switches 310A to 310E correspond to the switches “ST1” to “ST5”, respectively. The off state (OFF) and the on state (ON) of each rear detection switch 310 correspond to “0” and “1”, respectively.

  The color information table 520 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of color tables in which different color information is defined for each detection pattern of the rear detection switches 310A to 310E. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the color information table 520 includes a first color table 521 and a second color table 522.

  The first color table 521 is a standard color table in which the first set of color information is defined according to the detection patterns of the rear detection switches 310A to 310E. The second color table 522 is a special color table in which the second set of color information is defined according to the detection patterns of the rear detection switches 310A to 310E. The first set of color information is used more frequently than the second set of color information. The tape printer 1 selectively uses the first color table 521 and the second color table 522 to select color information (first set color information or second set color information) according to the detection patterns of the rear detection switches 310A to 310E. The color information) is specified, and details will be described later.

  The color information table 520 used in the tape printer 1 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. For example, a color information table 520 in which any other color information is added to the detection pattern corresponding to “reserved” can be used. The registered color information may be deleted, the correspondence between each detection pattern and the color information may be changed, or the color information table 520 in which the content of the color information corresponding to each detection pattern is changed may be used. In this case, the hole formation pattern determined for the above-described visual color information specification is also appropriately changed.

  As described above, the tape cassette 30 of the present embodiment is configured so that the person and the tape printer 1 can specify the tape type (specifically, color information) based on the rear indicator portion 900. . Since the person can visually recognize the rear indicator portion 900 and recognize the tape type, the following effects can be obtained.

  In a conventional method for manufacturing a tape cassette, a tape or the like is generally stored in a cassette case according to the type of tape mounted on the tape cassette. For example, depending on the color information (combination of tape color and character color) mounted on the tape cassette, the base color tape that matches the tape color and the ink color ink ribbon that matches the character color The worker had stored it in a cassette case.

  However, there are various combinations of tape color and character color. At the time of manufacturing the tape cassette, there is a possibility that an operator mistakenly stores a tape or ink ribbon different from the color information intended in advance in the cassette case. For this reason, the conventional tape cassette manufacturing process includes an inspection process for confirming whether or not the tape or ink ribbon stored in the manufactured tape cassette corresponds to the planned color.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the manufacturing process of the tape cassette 30, the operator visually observes the rear indicator portion 900 from the inside of the lower case 312 before assembling the upper case 311 to the lower case 312. Alternatively, the operator turns the lower case 312 over and visually inspects the rear indicator portion 900 before storing the tape or the like in the lower case 312. The operator can grasp the tape color and the character color to be stored in the cassette case 31 by specifying the color information indicated by the rear indicator section 900. Thus, since the operator can work while confirming the contents to be mounted on the cassette case 31, the manufacturing mistake of the tape cassette 30 can be reduced. As a result, the burden on the worker who performs the inspection process as described above can be reduced.

  After the tape cassette 30 is shipped, the color information can be recognized based on the rear indicator portion 900 by viewing the tape cassette 30 from the bottom even if the user cannot read the label indicating the tape type or the like for some reason. Therefore, the user can easily select the tape cassette 30 having desired color information from among the plurality of tape cassettes 30.

  The rear index portion 900 has a simple configuration of a combination of a hole and a surface portion (that is, a combination of the non-pressing portion 901 and the pressing portion 902) provided in each of the lateral information sections W1 and W2 (index portions 900A to 900E). It is. When the tape cassette 30 is manufactured, it is easy to form the rear indicator portion 900 in the cassette case 31. Therefore, there is no need to print on the cassette case 31 indicating the mounting contents or stick a label indicating the mounting contents. Therefore, manufacturing mistakes of the tape cassette 30 can be suppressed at a low cost.

  In the present embodiment, one of a hole (that is, a non-pressing portion 901) and a surface portion (that is, a pressing portion 902) corresponding to color information is provided in an overlapping region that functions as the index portions 900A to 900E. However, the hole and the surface can be freely formed in the specific region F0 within a range in which the function as the indicator portions 900A to 900E is ensured.

  Specifically, in the above-described tape cassette 30 (see FIGS. 41 and 42), all of the regions that do not function as the indicator portions 900A to 900E in the specific region F0 are flush with the pressing portion 902. Therefore, although all the holes (non-pressing parts 901) provided in the specific area F0 are independent, it is not necessary that all the holes are independent. For example, in the specific region F0, one hole (groove) having a size and shape that includes at least two of the plurality of non-pressing portions 901 may be formed. In the case of forming one groove portion, it is preferable not to include a portion that functions as the pressing portion 902.

  With reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the attachment / detachment aspect of the tape cassette 30 with respect to the cassette mounting part 8 is demonstrated. In FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in order to facilitate understanding, holes related to the attachment / detachment of the tape cassette 30 are indicated by phantom lines (two-dot chain lines). Of the cassette mounting portion 8, members relating to the attachment and detachment of the tape cassette 30 are shown. In FIG. 46, the guide hole 47 and the vicinity thereof are shown in a cross-sectional view in a right side view.

  First, the height relationship of each member erected on the cassette mounting portion 8 will be described. In the present embodiment, the head holder 74, the tape drive shaft 100, the ribbon take-up shaft 95, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 have an axial length (vertical length) that is at least larger than the width T of the common portion 32. Among these, the three guide shafts (that is, the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120) have substantially the same shaft length, and the shaft length of the ribbon take-up shaft 95 and the head holder 74 in the vertical direction. Greater than length. Therefore, with reference to the bottom surface of the cavity 811, the height positions of the upper ends of the tape drive shaft 100 and the auxiliary shaft 110 are larger than the height positions of the upper ends of the head holder 74 and the ribbon take-up shaft 95.

  As described above, the guide shaft 120 is erected on the corner support portion 812 positioned above the cavity 811. The upper end of the guide shaft 120 is higher than the upper ends of any of the head holder 74, the tape drive shaft 100, the ribbon take-up shaft 95, and the auxiliary shaft 110. That is, the guide shaft 120 extends above the tape drive shaft 100 and the auxiliary shaft 110.

  When the user mounts the tape cassette 30 in the cassette mounting portion 8, the upper plate 305 (see FIG. 20) and the bottom plate 306 (see FIG. 22) of the cassette case 31 are pushed downward while being kept substantially horizontal. At this time, the user substantially matches the relative positions of the roller support hole 64, the first tape support hole 65, and the guide hole 47 with respect to the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 in plan view.

  When the tape cassette 30 is moved downward toward the cassette mounting portion 8, as shown in FIG. 45, the upper ends of the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 are provided with openings 64B provided in the bottom plate 306, Enter 65B and 47B, respectively. At this time, since the upper ends of the head holder 74 and the ribbon take-up shaft 95 are located below the bottom plate 306, they have not entered the tape cassette 30.

  When the tape cassette 30 moves further downward from the state shown in FIG. 45, the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 are lowered to the shaft holes 46D, 65C, and 47C through the openings 64B, 65B, and 47B, respectively. Is inserted from. At this time, the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 come into contact with the inner walls of the shaft holes 46D, 65C, and 47C, respectively, thereby restricting movement of the tape cassette 30 in the circumferential direction. As a result, the tape cassette 30 is guided along the standing direction of the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 inserted into the shaft holes 46D, 65C, and 47C, respectively, and is also moved downward due to its own weight. Move to.

  In the present embodiment, the upper end edges of the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120 are tapered so that the shaft diameter decreases toward the tip. Therefore, even if there is a slight shift in the relative position in plan view with respect to the roller support hole 64, the first tape support hole 65, and the guide hole 47, the user can move the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120. It can be inserted properly and smoothly. Further, the shaft diameter of the tape drive shaft 100 is slightly smaller than the diameter of the shaft hole 46D. Therefore, the user can insert the tape drive shaft 100 into the roller support hole 64 even when the planar position of the tape drive roller 46 slightly changes in the roller support hole 64 due to vibration or inclination.

  As described above, the guide hole 47 has an opening width larger than the shaft diameter of the tip end portion (that is, the small diameter shaft portion 120B) of the guide shaft 120, and particularly has the largest opening width in the dividing line K direction (see FIG. 15). . That is, the allowable width of the positioning accuracy of the guide hole 47 with respect to the planar position of the guide shaft 120 is increased along the dividing line K. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted, the user can insert the guide shaft 120 into the guide hole 47 even if the relative position of the guide hole 47 in plan view with respect to the guide shaft 120 is slightly displaced in the dividing line K direction.

  As a result, the user can use the corresponding cavities of the tape cassette 30 (that is, the roller support hole 64, the guide hole 47, and the first tape support hole 65) with respect to all three guide shafts provided in the cassette mounting portion 8. ) Need not be positioned accurately. Therefore, the burden of positioning the tape cassette 30 by the user when the tape cassette 30 is mounted is reduced. Further, in order to make the dimensional widths of the roller support hole 64 and the guide hole 47 completely coincide with the dimensional widths of the tape drive shaft 100 and the guide shaft 120, high manufacturing accuracy is required for the operator.

  By providing play in the dividing line K direction in the guide hole 47 as described above, a slight error in the dimensional accuracy of the guide hole 47 is allowed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the operator to accurately form the guide hole 47 when the tape cassette 30 is manufactured.

  As the tape cassette 30 is guided downward, the head holder 74 including the thermal head 10 is inserted into the head insertion portion 39 from below. The ribbon take-up shaft 95 is inserted from below into the shaft hole 44C through the opening 68B. At this time, the lower head peripheral wall 36B (see FIG. 49) of the cassette case 31 contacts the upper portion of the claw portion 752 (see FIG. 49) of the cassette hook 75, and the flexible projecting portion 751 moves forward (see FIG. In 49, it bends in the right direction).

  When the tape cassette 30 is pushed downward to an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the position of the tape cassette 30 is fixed as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the base side of the guide shaft 120 (that is, the large diameter shaft portion 120 </ b> A) is fitted into the guide hole 47. As described above, the shaft diameter of the large-diameter shaft portion 120A is substantially equal to the opening width of the guide hole 47 at the virtual line G (see FIG. 15). Therefore, the large-diameter shaft portion 120A inserted into the guide hole 47 is tightly locked in the imaginary line G direction by the cylindrical wall portion 589 (see FIG. 36). Although not shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, positioning pins 102 and 103 (see FIG. 4) are inserted into pin holes 62 and 63 (see FIG. 16), respectively. Thereby, the movement of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 in the front-rear and left-right directions is restricted.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the first lower flat surface portion 391 </ b> B of the first receiving portion 391 comes into contact with the first support portion 741 of the head holder 74. The second lower flat surface portion 392 </ b> B of the second receiving portion 392 contacts the second support portion 742 of the head holder 74. That is, the first and second support portions 741 and 742 serving as a reference for the center position in the vertical direction of the thermal head 10 are in contact with the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B, which are reference surfaces, respectively. 30 is supported from below. At this time, the corner support portion 812 of the cassette mounting portion 8 also contacts the lower surface of the corner portions 321 to 324 of the cassette case 31 to support the tape cassette 30 from below. Thereby, the downward movement of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the claw portion 752 of the cassette hook 75 is locked to the locking portion 397 by the elastic force of the protruding portion 751. Further, when the cassette cover 6 is closed for printing, as shown in FIG. 47, the head pressing member 7 comes into contact with the first upper plane portion 393A of the press receiving portion 393 and presses the tape cassette 30 from above. . The peripheral holding members 911 and 912 (see FIG. 2) abut on the second and third upper plane portions 321A and 322A (see FIG. 15) of the first and second corner portions 321 and 322, respectively, and the tape cassette 30 is moved. Press from above. As a result, the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 is restricted from moving upward, that is, upward.

  As shown in FIG. 49, an inclined portion 375 is provided at a part of the lower end corner portion connecting the lower head peripheral wall 36 </ b> B of the cassette case 31 and the bottom plate 306. The inclined portion 375 is a chamfered portion provided directly below the locking portion 397, and is inclined from the front upper side (upper right side in FIG. 49) toward the rear lower side (lower left side in FIG. 49). When the tape cassette 30 is mounted, the inclined portion 375 contacts the claw portion 752 of the cassette hook 75 from above.

  As described above, the claw portion 752 is a projecting portion having a substantially triangular shape in cross section, and an upper end surface thereof is inclined from the front upper side toward the rear lower side. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted, the inclined portion 375 slides downward along the upper end surface of the claw portion 752. Accordingly, since the cassette hook 75 is prevented from interfering with the cassette case 31, the claw portion 752 is smoothly guided toward the locking portion 397. The user can smoothly push the tape cassette 30 into the cassette mounting portion 8.

  The cassette cover 6 is pivotally supported at both left and right end portions above the back surface of the tape printer 1. When the cassette cover 6 is closed, the tip of the head pressing member 7 does not approach the upper surface 301 of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 in the vertical direction, but at an acute angle from the rear to the front. To approach. The inclined portion 394 (see FIG. 15) provided behind the first upper plane portion 393A functions as a relief portion for eliminating interference when the head pressing member 7 approaches the first upper plane portion 393A.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the tape cassette 30 is guided to the appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8 by the three guide shafts (the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120). The tape cassette 30 is positioned at an appropriate plane position by the guide shaft 120 and the like, and is positioned at an appropriate height position by the first and second support portions 741 and 742 and the like. The tape cassette 30 mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8 is held by the cassette hook 75, the head pressing member 7 and the like.

  In other words, the tape cassette 30 is attached to or detached from the tape cassette 30 in the attaching / detaching direction (that is, up and down) by the guide shaft inserted into at least one of the three cavities (the roller support hole 64, the guide hole 47, and the first tape support hole 65). Direction) and movement in a direction different from the attaching / detaching direction (that is, the front-rear / left-right direction) is restricted. Therefore, the positioning of the tape cassette 30 with respect to the cassette mounting portion 8 can be facilitated.

  For example, when the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the head holder 74 is prevented from contacting the outer edge of the head insertion portion 39. Therefore, the user can smoothly insert the head holder 74 into the head insertion portion 39. Further, the user can accurately position the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 on the first and second support portions 741 and 742, respectively. As a result, the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 are reliably supported by the first and second support portions 741 and 742.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in a state where the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position, the cam member 100A of the tape drive shaft 100 properly meshes with the rib 46F (see FIG. 30) of the tape drive roller 46. The cam member 95A of the ribbon take-up shaft 95 meshes properly with the rib 44D (see FIG. 35) of the ribbon take-up spool 44. The thermal head 10 provided in the head holder 74 is disposed at an appropriate printing position of the head insertion portion 39. As a result, in the tape printer 1, the running of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is stabilized, so that proper printing can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the tape cassette 30 is accurately positioned in the vicinity of the thermal head 10 by the first and second support portions 741 and 742 provided in the head holder 74. The center position in the vertical direction of the print range of the thermal head 10 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be made to coincide with each other with high accuracy. Therefore, the printing quality for the tape can be improved.

  In particular, the tape cassette 30 is supported in the vicinity of the insertion position of the thermal head 10, specifically on both the upstream side and the downstream side in the tape conveyance direction with respect to the printing position. The transport direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 is accurately maintained perpendicular to the arrangement direction (vertical direction) of the thermal head 10. As a result, the running of the tape and ink ribbon 60 can be stabilized. The print center position in the vertical direction by the thermal head 10 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 can be matched more accurately.

  Further, a part of the restriction portions provided on the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 and the arm portion 34 (that is, the separation wall restriction portion 383, the first tape lower restriction portions 381B and 382B, the first print surface side restriction). All the portions 389) are provided in the lower case 312. Thus, regardless of the press-fit state of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312, the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392, the separation wall restricting portion 383, the first tape lower restricting portions 381B and 382B, and the first printing surface The positional relationship with the side regulating portion 389 is constant.

  Accordingly, as the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 are supported at appropriate height positions by the first and second support portions 741 and 742, respectively, the separation wall restriction portion 383 and the first tape lower restriction are provided. The portions 381B and 382B and the first print surface side restricting portion 389 are also held at appropriate height positions. As a result, the center position in the width direction of the tape transported in the arm portion 34 can be more accurately matched with the print center position in the vertical direction by the thermal head 10, so that the print quality can be further improved.

  When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the corner portions 321 to 324 are supported from below by the corner support portion 812. That is, in addition to the first and second lower plane portions 391B and 392B, the third and fourth lower plane portions 321B and 322B, which are also reference surfaces, are also supported. Therefore, for example, even when warp or the like is deformed in the cassette case 31, the height positions of the respective reference surfaces are corrected by supporting the reference surfaces at a plurality of positions from below. Therefore, the running performance and print position accuracy of the tape or ink ribbon 60 can be maintained well.

  When the cassette cover 6 is closed, the head pressing member 7 presses the first upper flat surface portion 393A located directly above the first lower flat surface portion 391B from above. That is, in the tape cassette 30, the first lower plane portion 391 </ b> B and the first upper plane portion 393 </ b> A that are reference surfaces are sandwiched between the first support portion 741 and the head pressing member 7 from above and below.

  Therefore, the tape cassette 30 is securely fixed from the up and down direction and can be appropriately positioned near the printing position. The upward movement (so-called floating) of the tape cassette 30 mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8 can be restricted. The center position in the vertical direction of the print range of the thermal head 10 and the center position in the width direction of the film tape 59 can be matched more accurately. As a result, it is possible to stably carry and print the tape.

  Further, the peripheral pressing members 911 and 912 press the second and third upper flat portions 321A and 322A from above, respectively. That is, the tape cassette 30 is sandwiched from above and below at three locations. Since the surface surrounded by connecting three places covers a wide range, the tape cassette 30 is more reliably fixed. For example, even when deformation such as warpage occurs in the cassette case 31, the height position of each reference surface is reliably corrected. Therefore, the running performance and print position accuracy of the tape or ink ribbon 60 can be improved.

  The first receiving portion 391 and the second receiving portion 392 face the head insertion portion 39 from directions orthogonal to each other. The first and second receiving portions 391 and 392 are inserted into first and second support portions 741 and 742 extending in directions orthogonal to each other, and the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B are respectively viewed from below. To support. Accordingly, the first and second support portions 741 and 742 restrict not only the vertical movement of the tape cassette 30 but also the movement of the tape cassette 30 in the front-rear direction and the horizontal direction. Thereby, the positional relationship between the thermal head 10 and the head insertion portion 39 can be held more appropriately.

  The cassette hook 75 more reliably restricts the upward movement of the tape cassette 30, that is, upward movement, similarly to the head pressing member 7 and the like. Thereby, conveyance and printing of a tape can be stabilized more.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the distance H2 between the first and second lower flat portions 391B and 392B and the center position in the width direction of the tape stored in the cassette case 31 (center line N of the cassette case 31) is It is constant regardless of the tape type of the cassette 30. The distance H1 between the first upper plane portion 393A and the center line N is also constant regardless of the tape type of the tape cassette 30. That is, even if the vertical height of the tape cassette 30 is different, the distances H1 and H2 are constant. Accordingly, a plurality of types of tape cassettes 30 having different heights can be used with the same tape printer 1.

  Conventionally, when a tape is transported when a printing operation is performed, the tape meanders when the pressure difference to the tape that occurs in the width direction exceeds an allowable range unless the center position in the width direction matches regardless of the tape width. There was a possibility. In this embodiment, the distances H1 and H2 are constant regardless of the tape width. Therefore, at the time of execution of the printing operation, even if the tapes have different widths, the tapes are conveyed at positions where the respective centers in the width direction coincide. Therefore, meandering of the tape due to the pressure difference generated in the width direction can be prevented.

  Further, since the distance H1 and the distance H2 are equal, the balance between the support from the lower side and the pressing from the upper side with respect to the tape cassette 30 is good. Therefore, it is possible to stably maintain an appropriate positional relationship between the center position in the vertical direction of the print range of the thermal head 10 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60.

  When removing the tape cassette 30 from the cassette mounting portion 8, for example, the user may pull the tape cassette 30 upward from the cassette mounting portion 8 while holding the left and right ends of the cassette case 31 with fingers. Also at this time, the tape cassette 30 is guided upward by the three guide shafts (the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120). Therefore, in the process of removing the tape cassette 30 from the cassette mounting portion 8, the tape cassette 30 is unlikely to tilt. As a result, the tape cassette 30 can be prevented from being caught on the inner wall or the like of the cassette mounting portion 8.

  Thus, when the tape cassette 30 is attached and detached, the tape cassette 30 is wound around the pair of diagonal portions (specifically, the roller support hole 64 and the guide hole 47) and the first tape spool 40 in plan view. The tape cassette 30 is guided in the vertical direction at three points with the center of gravity of the tape (specifically, the first tape support hole 65). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately prevent the tape cassette 30 from being tilted from an appropriate posture or being displaced in the process of being mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8.

  The center of gravity of the entire tape cassette 30 is preferably located in a region connecting the roller support hole 64, the first tape support hole 65, and the guide hole 47 in plan view. According to this, the weight of the tape cassette 30 acts evenly distributed at three points (that is, the tape drive shaft 100, the auxiliary shaft 110, and the guide shaft 120) where the tape cassette 30 is guided in plan view. The movement of the tape cassette 30 in the attaching / detaching direction becomes smooth, and the occurrence of positional deviation and tilt in the process of mounting the tape cassette 30 is more reliably prevented. The tape cassette 30 of this embodiment has a center of gravity located in a region connecting the roller support hole 64, the first tape support hole 65, and the guide hole 47 in a plan view regardless of the tape type (FIGS. 5 to 8). reference).

  More preferably, the center of gravity of the entire tape cassette 30 is preferably located on or near the dividing line K in plan view. In this embodiment, the laminate-type tape cassette 30 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) and the receptor-type tape cassette 30 (see FIG. 7) have a weight distribution in which the center of gravity is located on or near the dividing line K in plan view. Have Therefore, in the process of mounting these tape cassettes 30 on the cassette mounting unit 8, tilting due to the weight of the tape cassette 30 is unlikely to occur.

  At least two points of the fourth corner portion 324 provided with the roller support hole 64 and the second corner portion 322 provided with the guide hole 47 at the opposite corner are guided to attach and detach the tape cassette 30. . In the vicinity of the fourth corner 324, the tape is fed out by the tape driving roller 46 and the printing by the thermal head 10 is performed. In the exposed portion 77 provided in the vicinity of the fourth corner portion 324, the tape is exposed for printing. For this reason, the positioning of the tape cassette 30 in the vicinity of the fourth corner 324 greatly affects the print quality and the tape running.

  In this embodiment, the tape cassette 30 is guided along the tape drive shaft 100 inserted into the roller support hole 64. Therefore, the tape cassette 30 can be accurately positioned in the vicinity of the position where the tape is fed and printed. It can suppress that the tape exposed outside in the process of mounting the tape cassette 30 is entangled with other members. By using the tape drive shaft 100 as one of the guide shafts, it is not necessary to separately install a shaft body for guiding the tape cassette 30 in the vicinity of the fourth corner portion 324, and the structure of the tape printer 1 is complicated. This can be suppressed.

  Further, the tape cassette 30 is guided along the guide shaft 120 inserted into the guide hole 47. That is, the tape cassette 30 is guided in the attaching / detaching direction even in the vicinity of the second corner portion 322. Thereby, the tape cassette 30 can be stably guided in the attaching / detaching direction at the both diagonal positions where the largest distance between the two points can be secured in plan view.

  A mode in which the tape printer 1 detects the tape type of the tape cassette 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51.

  With reference to FIG. 50, the detection mode of the arm index part 800 by the arm detection part 200 will be described. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8 and the cassette cover 6 is closed, the platen holder 12 moves from the standby position (see FIG. 5) toward the printing position (see FIGS. 6 to 8). To do. At this time, the arm detection part 200 and the locking piece 225 move toward the arm index part 800 and the locking hole 820 of the tape cassette 30, respectively.

  If the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the locking piece 225 is inserted into the locking hole 820. In this case, the switch terminal 222 of the arm detection switch 210 is opposed to the index part (the non-pressing part 801 or the pressing part 802) of the arm index part 800 without being interfered by the locking piece 225. At this time, the arm detection switch 210 facing the non-pressing portion 801 is inserted into the non-pressing portion 801 and is turned off. The arm detection switch 210 facing the pressing portion 802 is pressed by the pressing portion 802 and turned on.

  For example, when the tape cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the arm detection switches 210A, 210C, and 210D are non-pressing portions 801 as shown in FIG. Since the indicator portions 800A, 800C, and 800D face each other, the off state is “0”. Since the arm detection switches 210B and 210E face the indicator portions 800B and 800E that are the pressing portions 802, respectively, the arm detection switches 210B and 210E are in the on state “1”. That is, the on / off states of the switches “SW1” to “SW5” corresponding to the arm detection switches 210A to 210E are “0”, “1”, “0”, “0”, and “1”, respectively.

  In the tape printer 1, the printing information is specified as the tape type of the tape cassette 30 based on the detection pattern of the arm detection unit 200 (that is, the combination of ON / OFF of the five arm detection switches 210 </ b> A to 210 </ b> E). In the above example, referring to the printing information table 510 (FIG. 40), the tape width “36 mm”, the printing mode “mirror image printing (laminate)”, and the color table “first” are the same as the visual identification result described above. The “color table” can be specified.

  As described above, since the locking piece 225 is provided with the inclined portion 226, the thickness gradually decreases toward the rear. Since the locking hole 820 is provided with the inclined portion 821, the opening width in the vertical direction gradually increases toward the front. For example, when the tape cassette 30 is slightly lifted from the appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the locking piece 225 is slightly shifted downward with respect to the locking hole 820. Even in such a case, when the platen holder 12 moves toward the printing position, the locking piece 225 is guided into the locking hole 820 by the interaction between the inclined portion 226 and the inclined portion 821.

  That is, as long as the tape cassette 30 is slightly lifted from the appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the locking piece 225 can be properly inserted into the locking hole 820. As a result, the arm detection unit 200 can be accurately opposed to the arm index unit 800.

  On the other hand, for example, when the downward pushing of the tape cassette 30 is insufficient, the locking piece 225 contacts the surface portion of the arm front wall 35 without being inserted into the locking hole 820. As described above, the locking piece 225 has a slightly higher protruding height than the switch terminals 222. When the locking piece 225 is in contact with the surface portion of the arm front wall 35, the switch terminal 222 cannot contact the arm front wall 35.

  As described above, when the locking piece 225 hinders the contact between the switch terminal 222 and the arm index portion 800, the arm detection switches 210A to 210E are all turned off. That is, the on / off states of the switches “SW1” to “SW5” are “0”, “0”, “0”, “0”, and “0”, respectively. In this mounted state, the tape printer 1 can identify “Error 1” with reference to the printing information table 510 (FIG. 40).

  Further, in the case of the tape printer 1 that does not include the locking piece 225, the switch can be used if the arm detection switch 210 faces the surface portion of the arm front wall 35 even if the tape cassette 30 is not mounted at an appropriate position. The terminal 222 is pressed (that is, turned on). As described above, the indicator portions 800A to 800E are arranged in a zigzag, and there are no indicator portions 800A to 800E arranged on the same line in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the tape cassette 30 is shifted in the vertical direction from the appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, an error is detected in the following manner.

  For example, since the tape cassette 30 is slightly displaced from the appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the height position at the lower end of the arm front wall 35 may be lower than the arm detection switch 210E in the lower row. . In this case, all the arm detection switches 210 </ b> A to 210 </ b> E are all turned on because they face the surface portion of the arm front wall 35. That is, the on / off states of the switches “SW1” to “SW5” are “1”, “1”, “1”, “1”, and “1”, respectively. In this mounted state, the tape printer 1 can identify “Error 3” with reference to the printing information table 510 (FIG. 40).

  Further, since the tape cassette 30 is largely displaced from the appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the height position at the lower end portion of the arm front wall 35 is determined by the middle row arm detection switches 210A and 210C and the lower row arm detection. May be between switch 210E. In this case, the arm detection switches 210 </ b> A to 210 </ b> D are turned on while facing the surface portion of the arm front wall 35, and the arm detection switch 210 </ b> E is turned off without facing the surface portion of the arm front wall 35. That is, the on / off states of the switches “SW1” to “SW5” are “1”, “1”, “1”, “1”, and “0”, respectively. In this mounted state, the tape printer 1 can specify “error 2” with reference to the printing information table 510 (FIG. 40).

  As described above, the arm index portion 800 of the present embodiment employs a combination pattern of the pressing portion 802 (surface portion) and the non-pressing portion 801 (hole portion) corresponding to any of “Error 1” to “Error 3”. It has not been. Thereby, the tape printer 1 can detect not only the tape type but also the mounting state of the tape cassette 30.

  The arm part 34 is a part for discharging the tape and the ink ribbon 60 from the discharge port 341 to the exposed part 77. Therefore, the vertical positional relationship between the thermal head 10 inserted into the head insertion portion 39 and the tape and ink ribbon 60 is determined by the arm portion 34. Conventionally, for example, when the user does not correctly mount the tape cassette 30 or when the tape printer 1 is not correctly operated, the arm unit 34 may not be properly positioned in the cassette mounting unit 8. In this case, there is an error in the positional relationship between the tape and ink ribbon 60 and the thermal head 10, and printing may be performed at a position shifted with respect to the width direction of the tape.

  The arm index portion 800 of the present embodiment is provided on the arm portion 34 (specifically, the arm front wall 35) located in the vicinity of the head insertion portion 39. The arm part 34 is a part where it is easy to detect an error in the positional relationship between the tape and ink ribbon 60 and the thermal head 10. Therefore, the tape printer 1 can accurately determine whether or not the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting unit 8 with the arm unit 34 as a reference.

  The locking hole 820 is provided in the lower arm front wall 35B. When the locking piece 225 is inserted into the locking hole 820, the position of the lower arm front wall 35B is fixed, and consequently the position of the arm portion 34 portion of the lower case 312 is also fixed. Therefore, for example, the vibration of the arm portion 34 during the printing operation is suppressed. Further, the restricting portions (the separation wall restricting portion 383, the first tape lower restricting portion 381B, the first print surface side restricting portion 389, etc.) provided in the arm portion 34 portion of the lower case 312 are also positioned at an appropriate height position. (See FIG. 27). Therefore, regardless of the press-fit state of the upper case 311 and the lower case 312, it is possible to stabilize the tape transport in the arm portion 34, and to more reliably regulate the movement of the tape in the width direction and the print surface side. it can.

  The arm indicator section 800 is provided on the side wall (specifically, the arm front wall 35) of the cassette case 31 in correspondence with the plurality of arm detection switches 210 projecting horizontally. When the arm indicator unit 800 selectively presses the plurality of arm detection switches 210, the repulsive force of the arm detection switch 210 facing the pressing unit 802 is applied to the arm front wall 35.

  As described above, the tape cassette 30 is restricted from moving in a direction different from the attaching / detaching direction by the guide shaft inserted into at least one of the three cavities. Therefore, even when the repulsive force of the arm detection switch 210 is applied to the arm front wall 35, it is possible to suppress the tape cassette 30 from moving in the side surface direction, thereby reducing the possibility that the tape type is erroneously detected.

  The arm index portion 800 is provided on the lower arm front wall 35 </ b> B and is adjacent to the locking hole 820. Therefore, when the locking piece 225 is inserted into the locking hole 820, the arm index portion 800 is fixed at an appropriate position, so that the tape type detection accuracy by the arm detection unit 200 is improved. Further, for example, when vibration occurs during the printing operation of the tape printer 1, even if the upper contact / separation part 86A is separated from the lower contact / separation part 86B, the position of the lower contact / separation part 86B is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the physical durability of the arm unit 34 while suppressing the influence on the tape transport and the detection of the tape type performed by the arm unit 34.

  With reference to FIG. 51, the detection aspect of the back index part 900 by the back detection part 300 is demonstrated. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted at an appropriate position in the cassette mounting portion 8, the rear support portion 813 supports the rear step wall 360A of the cassette case 31 from below. At this time, the rear detection unit 300 provided in the rear support unit 813 faces the rear index unit 900 provided in the rear step wall 360A.

  In this case, the switch terminal 317 of the rear detection switch 310 faces the indicator portion (the non-pressing portion 901 or the pressing portion 902) of the rear indicator portion 900. At this time, the rear detection switch 310 facing the non-pressing portion 901 is inserted into the non-pressing portion 901 and is turned off. The rear detection switch 310 facing the pressing portion 902 is pressed by the pressing portion 902 and turned on.

  For example, when the tape cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 is mounted at an appropriate position of the cassette mounting portion 8, the rear detection switches 310 </ b> A and 310 </ b> E are non-pressing portions 901 as shown in FIG. 51. Since it is opposed to 900A and 900E, it is turned off. Since the rear detection switches 310B to 310D are opposed to the indicator portions 900B to 900D which are the pressing portions 902, they are turned on. That is, the on / off states of the switches “ST1” to “ST5” corresponding to the rear detection switches 310A to 310E are “0”, “1”, “1”, “1”, and “0”, respectively.

  In the tape printer 1, the color information is specified as the tape type of the tape cassette 30 based on the detection pattern of the rear detection unit 300 (here, the combination of ON / OFF of the five rear detection switches 310 </ b> A to 310 </ b> E). In the above example, with reference to the color information table 520 (see FIG. 44), the on / off states “0”, “1”, “1”, “1”, “0” of the rear detection switches 310A to 310E are set. Corresponding color information is identified.

  However, the specified color information differs depending on which of a plurality of color tables included in the color information table 520 is used. In the present embodiment, the first color table 521 is used for specifying the color information in accordance with the above-described OFF state of the arm detection switch 210D. As a result, the tape color “White” and the character color “Black” are specified in the same manner as the visual identification result described above.

  As described above, in the tape cassette 30 of the present embodiment, the arm indicator portion 800 and the rear indicator portion 900 are provided at positions separated from each other and on different wall surfaces in the cassette case 31. That is, the position and range of the index portion indicating the tape type are not limited to one wall surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of patterns of the tape type detected by the tape printer 1. As a result, the design freedom of the tape cassette 30 can be improved.

  Furthermore, the arm indicator unit 800 and the rear indicator unit 900 selectively press the plurality of arm detection switches 210 and the plurality of rear detection switches 310 from positions separated from each other and from different directions, respectively. Thereby, the tape printer 1 can clearly distinguish different elements (that is, printing information and color information) included in the tape type. Therefore, the tape cassette 30 can cause the tape printer 1 to detect printing information and color information more accurately.

  As described above, when the rear indicator portion 900 selectively presses the plurality of rear detection switches 310, the repulsive force of the rear detection switch 310 facing the pressing portion 902 is applied to the rear step wall 360A. At this time, the rear end side of the cassette case 31 may be lifted by the repulsive force of the rear detection switch 310.

  In the present embodiment, both the arm index portion 800 and the rear index portion 900 are provided at the center position of the cassette case 31 in the longitudinal direction (that is, the left-right direction). That is, the repulsive force of the rear detection switch 310 is applied to the center position in the left-right direction on the rear end side of the cassette case 31. Even when the rear end side of the cassette case 31 is lifted, the cassette case 31 hardly tilts in the left-right direction, and therefore, the influence on the front end side of the cassette case 31 is small. Therefore, even when the rear end side of the cassette case 31 is lifted, a change in the positional relationship between the arm index unit 800 and the plurality of arm detection switches 210 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tape printer 1 from erroneously detecting printing information.

  The rear indicator 900 is provided on the bottom plate 306 (specifically, the rear step wall 360A) of the cassette case 31 corresponding to the plurality of rear detection switches 310 protruding upward. As described above, the tape cassette is guided in the attaching / detaching direction along the guide shaft inserted into at least one of the pair of cavities. The attaching / detaching direction of the tape cassette 30 is parallel to the advancing / retreating direction of the plurality of rear detection switches 310. When the tape cassette 30 is mounted on the cassette mounting portion 8, the rear detection switch 310 facing the pressing portion 902 is pressed in the direction opposite to the protruding direction (that is, downward).

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress a load from being applied to the rear detection switch 310 pressed by the pressing unit 902 in a direction different from the forward / backward direction. As a result, the bending or breakage of the rear detection switch 310 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the rear detection switch 310 is pressed accurately, the tape type detection accuracy can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 52, the process which concerns on the printing of the tape printer 1 which concerns on this embodiment is demonstrated. The processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. 52 is executed by the CPU 601 based on a program stored in the ROM 602 when the tape printer 1 is powered on (see FIG. 14).

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the process related to printing by the tape printer 1, first, the printing information of the tape cassette 30 is specified based on the detection pattern of the arm detection unit 200 (step S1). In step S1, printing information corresponding to the on / off combination of the arm detection switches 210A to 210E is specified based on the printing information table 510 (see FIG. 40).

  After execution of step S1, it is determined whether or not the arm detection switch 210D (hereinafter, switch SW4) is in an on state (step S3). When the switch SW4 is in the off state (step S3: NO), the first color table 521 is selected from the color information table 520 (see FIG. 44) (step S5). When the switch SW4 is on (step S3: YES), the second color table 522 is selected from the color information table 520 (step S7).

  After execution of step S5 or step S7, the color information of the tape cassette 30 is specified based on the detection pattern of the rear detection unit 300 (step S9). In step S9, color information corresponding to the on / off combination of the rear detection switches 310A to 310E is specified with reference to the color table selected in step S5 or step S7.

  In the present embodiment, the color table used for specifying the color information of the tape cassette 30 is selected according to the detection state of the specific arm detection switch 210 (specifically, the on / off state of the arm detection switch 210D). (See steps S3 to S7). Therefore, the number of color information patterns that can be specified by the tape printer 1 can be increased without increasing the number of the rear detection switches 310 (that is, without increasing the area occupied by the rear detection unit 300).

  After execution of step S9, the printing information specified in step S1 and the color information specified in step S9 are displayed as text information on the display 5 (step S11). For example, when the tape cassette 30 (see FIGS. 37 to 39, FIG. 41 and FIG. 42) described above is properly installed, a “36 mm laminate type tape cassette is installed on the display 5. The tape color is "White, character color is Black" is displayed.

  After execution of step S11, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the keyboard 3 (step S13). If there is an input from the keyboard 3 (step S13: YES), an input of print data is accepted (step S15). In step S <b> 15, the CPU 601 receives a character input from the keyboard 3 as print data, and stores the print data (document data) in the text memory of the RAM 604. If there is no input from the keyboard 3 (step S13: NO), the process returns to step S13, and the CPU 601 waits for an input from the keyboard 3.

  Thereafter, for example, when printing is instructed from the keyboard 3, the print data stored in the text memory is processed in accordance with the printing information specified in step S1 (step S17). For example, in step S17, the print range and print size of the print data are processed according to the tape width specified in step S1. The print position of the print data is processed according to the print mode (laminate or receptor) specified in step S1. After execution of step S17, a tape printing process is executed based on the processed print data (step S19). When the printing process in step S19 is completed, the process relating to printing (FIG. 52) ends.

  In the printing process of step S19, when the laminate type tape cassette 30 shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 is mounted, the tape driving roller 46 rotated by the tape driving shaft 100 cooperates with the movable conveying roller 14. Thus, the film tape 59 is pulled out from the second tape spool 41. The ribbon take-up spool 44 that is rotationally driven by the ribbon take-up shaft 95 pulls out the unused ink ribbon 60 from the ribbon spool 42 in synchronization with the printing speed.

  The film tape 59 and the ink ribbon 60 are transported in the arm portion 34, overlapped at the discharge port 341, discharged to the exposed portion 77, and transported between the thermal head 10 and the platen roller 15. In the thermal head 10, mirror image printing for transferring a character as a mirror image on the film tape 59 using the ink ribbon 60 is performed.

  Further, the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is pulled out from the first tape spool 40 by the cooperation of the tape driving roller 46 and the movable conveying roller 14. The double-sided adhesive tape 58 is adhered to the printed surface of the printed film tape 59 while being guided and wound between the tape driving roller 46 and the movable conveying roller 14. The used ink ribbon 60 is peeled off from the printed film tape 59 by the ribbon guide wall 38 and taken up on the ribbon take-up spool 44. The film tape 59 to which the double-sided adhesive tape 58 is stuck (that is, the printed tape 50) is further conveyed toward the discharge guide portion 49 and cut by the cutting mechanism 17.

  When the receptor-type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 7 is mounted, the tape drive roller 46 that is rotationally driven by the tape drive shaft 100 cooperates with the movable transport roller 14 from the first tape spool 40 to the print tape. Pull out 57. The ribbon take-up spool 44 that is rotationally driven by the ribbon take-up shaft 95 pulls out the unused ink ribbon 60 from the ribbon spool 42 in synchronization with the printing speed.

  After the print tape 57 and the ink ribbon 60 are conveyed in the arm portion 34, the print tape 57 and the ink ribbon 60 are overlapped at the discharge port 341, discharged to the exposed portion 77, and conveyed between the thermal head 10 and the platen roller 15. In the thermal head 10, normal image printing is performed in which the character is transferred as a normal image onto the print tape 57 using the ink ribbon 60.

  The used ink ribbon 60 is peeled off from the printed printing tape 57 by the ribbon guide wall 38 and taken up on the ribbon take-up spool 44. The printed printing tape 57 (that is, the printed tape 50) is further conveyed toward the discharge guide portion 49 and is cut by the cutting mechanism 17.

  When the thermal type tape cassette 30 shown in FIG. 8 is mounted, the tape drive roller 46 that is rotationally driven by the tape drive shaft 100 is moved from the first tape spool 40 to the thermal paper tape in cooperation with the movable transport roller 14. Pull out 55. The thermal paper tape 55 is transported through the arm portion 34, is then discharged from the discharge port 341 to the exposed portion 77, and is transported between the thermal head 10 and the platen roller 15. In the thermal head 10, normal image printing is performed in which the character is developed as a normal image on the thermal paper tape 55. The printed thermal paper tape 55 (that is, the printed tape 50) is further conveyed toward the discharge guide portion 49 and cut by the cutting mechanism 17.

  During execution of the printing process (step S19), the tape cassette 30 is kept in a stable mounting state by the action of the first and second receiving portions 391 and 392, the head pressing member 7, the cassette hook 75, and the like. Therefore, the tape printer 1 performs printing on the print surface of the tape in a state where the vertical center position of the print range of the thermal head 10 and the center position in the width direction of the tape and the ink ribbon 60 are accurately matched. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the tape cassette 30 which is a general-purpose cassette is used in the tape printer 1 which is a general-purpose machine. Thereby, one tape printer 1 can be used for various types of tape cassettes such as a thermal type, a receptor type, and a laminate type. Therefore, it is not necessary to use a different tape printer 1 for each type of tape cassette 30. Further, when manufacturing a tape cassette 30 corresponding to a tape having the same tape width, a common mold is used except for some molds such as a mold including a portion that forms the arm index portion 800 and the rear index portion 900. Because it can be used, the cost is greatly reduced.

  The tape cassette 30 and the tape printer 1 according to the present invention are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and it is needless to say that various changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  For example, like the tape cassette 130 shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an adjustment rib 940 for stabilizing the amount of tape drawn from the second tape spool 41 may be provided in the second tape region 410.

  The adjustment rib 940 is a plate-like member provided on the most downstream side of the transport path of the film tape 59 in the second tape region 410, and includes a first adjustment rib 941 and a second adjustment rib 942. The first adjustment rib 941 is in contact with the back side of the film tape 59 drawn from the second tape spool 41. The second adjustment rib 942 is in contact with the print surface side of the film tape 59 drawn from the second tape spool 41 on the downstream side of the first adjustment rib 941.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the amount of the film tape 59 wound around the second tape spool 41 is large (that is, when the winding diameter of the film tape 59 is large), the first adjustment rib 941 causes the film tape to be 59 conveyance paths are largely refracted. At this time, the frictional force of the film tape 59 in contact with the first adjustment rib 941 is increased, so that a large rotational load is applied to the second tape spool 41.

  As the film tape 59 is pulled out from the second tape spool 41, the amount of the film tape 59 wound around the second tape spool 41 decreases (that is, the winding diameter of the film tape 59 decreases). As shown in FIG. 54, when the winding diameter of the film tape 59 is small, the conveyance path of the film tape 59 is refracted by the first adjusting rib 941. At this time, since the frictional force of the film tape 59 in contact with the first adjustment rib 941 is reduced, a small rotational load is applied to the second tape spool 41.

  Thus, as the winding diameter of the film tape 59 increases, the back tension of the film tape 59 increases as the rotational load applied to the second tape spool 41 increases. On the other hand, the smaller the winding diameter of the film tape 59, the smaller the back tension of the film tape 59 as the rotational load applied to the second tape spool 41 becomes smaller. That is, the back tension of the film tape 59 is adjusted by applying an optimum rotational load to the second tape spool 41 according to the winding diameter of the film tape 59. As described above, the amount of the tape drawn from the second tape spool 41 can be stabilized with a simple structure in which the adjustment rib 940 is provided in the second tape region 410.

  As described above, the clutch spring 572 (see FIG. 33) for applying the back tension to the film tape 59 is attached to the second tape spool 41. When the film tape 59 rotates in the pulling direction, the rotational load (that is, load torque) of the second tape spool 41 is stably applied by the clutch spring 572. However, the back tension to the film tape generated by this load torque changes according to the winding diameter of the film tape 59.

  Specifically, the load torque applied by the clutch spring 572 is constant. However, the larger the winding diameter of the film tape 59, the smaller the back tension caused by the clutch spring 572, while the larger the back tension applied by the adjusting rib 940. That is, when the back tension due to the clutch spring 572 is small, the adjustment rib 940 supplements the large back tension.

  Further, the smaller the winding diameter of the film tape 59, the larger the back tension caused by the clutch spring 572, while the smaller the back tension applied by the adjusting rib 940. That is, when the back tension due to the clutch spring 572 increases, the back tension supplemented by the adjustment rib 940 decreases according to the increase.

  That is, in addition to the back tension being applied to the film tape 59 by the clutch spring 572, the optimal back tension according to the winding diameter of the film tape 59 is complementarily applied by the adjustment rib 940. Thereby, regardless of the winding diameter of the film tape 59, the back tension of the film tape 59 is stabilized as a whole, so that the amount of the film tape 59 drawn out from the second tape spool 41 becomes more stable. As a result, the running of the film tape 59 during the printing operation is more stable, and the deterioration of the printing quality caused by the running failure of the film tape 59 can be more reliably suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the non-pressing part 801 and the non-pressing part 901 are through holes provided in the cassette case 31. The non-pressing portion 801 is not limited to the through hole as long as it can be inserted and removed without pressing the switch terminal 222 of the arm detection switch 210 facing the non-pressing portion 801. Similarly, the non-pressing portion 901 is not limited to the through hole as long as it can be inserted and removed without pressing the switch terminal 317 of the opposing rear detection switch 310. For example, the non-pressing portion 801 may be a recess in which a part of the arm front wall 35 is recessed backward and the switch terminal 222 can be inserted and removed. The non-pressing portion 901 may be a concave portion in which a part of the rear stepped wall 360A is recessed upward and the switch terminal 317 can be inserted and removed.

  In the above embodiment, the tape and the ink ribbon 60 are wound around the spool (specifically, the first tape spool 40, the second tape spool 41, and the ribbon spool 42). The tape and the ink ribbon 60 may not be wound around the spool as long as the roll is rotatable. For example, the tape or the ink ribbon 60 may be a so-called coreless type roll body wound so as to form a hole in the center without using a spool.

  The embodiment of the tape cassette according to the present invention has been described above. Each technical feature of the tape cassette disclosed in the above embodiment may be used singly or in combination. In the following, various aspects of a tape cassette having one or more of the above technical features will be exemplified. Note that the parentheses attached to the technical features described below exemplify the reference numerals of the constituent elements corresponding to the technical features in the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the past, for example, when the user did not correctly mount the tape cassette or when the tape printer was not operated correctly, the tape cassette was sometimes fitted into the cassette mounting portion in an inclined state from an appropriate posture. It was. When the tape cassette is tilted in the cassette mounting portion, the cassette detection portion may not accurately face a plurality of detection switches. In this case, the cassette detection unit may not press the detection switch that is scheduled to be pressed, or may press the detection switch that is not scheduled to be pressed.

  When a plurality of detection switches are pressed in an incorrect pattern, the tape printer detects a tape type different from the tape type stored in the tape cassette mounted in the cassette mounting portion. As described above, when the wrong type of tape is detected by the tape printer, there is a possibility that malfunction of the tape printer or defective printing may occur. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect has a box shape in which a bottom wall (306), an upper wall (305), and side walls (303, 304) define an outer shape and includes a plurality of corners (321 to 324). A cassette case (31), at least one tape (55, 57, 58, 59) stored in a tape storage area (400, 410) defined in the outer shape, and extending from the bottom wall; A pair of cavities (47, 64) provided at both ends of a diagonal line connecting the one corner (322) and the other corner (324) between the tape storage area and the outer shape; A side indicator portion (800) provided on the side wall and indicating the type of the tape, and the side indicator portion includes a plurality of indicator portions (800A to 800E) arranged in a pattern according to the type of the tape. Including the plurality Each indicator unit is either switch hole (801) and face (802).

  When the tape cassette according to this aspect is attached to and detached from the cassette mounting portion (8) of the tape printer (1) and the tape printer includes a pair of guide shafts (100, 120), a pair of cavities The guide shaft is inserted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the tape cassette from tilting from an appropriate posture by attaching and detaching the tape cassette to and from the cassette mounting portion along the pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities.

  When the tape cassette is mounted on a cassette mounting portion of a tape printer having a plurality of detection switches (210), the side surface indicator portion accurately faces the plurality of detection switches. The plurality of detection switches are switches that can advance and retract in a predetermined direction. The side surface index part facing the plurality of detection switches selectively presses the plurality of detection switches according to the combination of the switch hole and the surface part in the plurality of index parts. That is, each of the plurality of detection switches is in a pressed or non-pressed state depending on the type of tape. Thus, the tape cassette can cause the tape printer to accurately detect the type of tape. Further, it is possible to suppress a tape running failure or a printing head printing failure caused by the tape cassette being inclined in the cassette mounting portion.

  The side surface indicator portion is provided on the side wall of the cassette case in correspondence with the plurality of detection switches protruding horizontally. When the side surface indicator portion selectively presses the plurality of detection switches, the repulsive force of the plurality of detection switches is applied to the side wall. Movement of the tape cassette in a direction different from the attaching / detaching direction is restricted by a pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities. Therefore, even when the repulsive force of a plurality of detection switches is applied to the side wall, it is possible to suppress the tape cassette from moving in the side surface direction, thereby suppressing the possibility that the type of tape is erroneously detected.

(2) The conventional tape cassette is provided with a cassette detection unit on the lower surface of the tape cassette in correspondence with the tape printer having a plurality of detection switches protruding upward. On the lower surface of the tape cassette, there are provided a support hole into which a drive shaft for transporting a tape and an ink ribbon is inserted, a head insertion portion into which a head holder having a print head is inserted, and the like.

  Therefore, the lower surface of the tape cassette is likely to be restricted in the position and range where the cassette detector is disposed. For example, when increasing the number of patterns of the type of tape detected by the tape printer, it is necessary to widen the formation range of the cassette detection unit. If the position and range of the cassette detection unit are restricted as described above, it is difficult to increase the number of tape types of patterns, which may impair the design freedom of the tape cassette. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect is a box-shaped body having a front wall (35), a bottom wall (306), and an upper wall (305), and a cassette case (31) whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction; The tape (55, 57, 58, 59) housed in the cassette case, and a first element of a plurality of elements included in the tape type, provided at a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the front wall A front surface index portion (800) indicating a bottom surface index portion (900) provided at a substantially central position in the left-right direction at the rear end portion of the bottom wall, and indicating a second element of the plurality of elements, The front indicator portion includes a plurality of first indicator portions (800A to 800E) arranged in a pattern according to the first element, and the bottom indicator portion is arranged in a pattern according to the second element. A plurality of second indicator parts (90 A to 900E), each of the plurality of first indicator portions is either a switch hole (801) or a surface portion (802), and each of the plurality of second indicator portions is a switch hole (901). And the surface portion (902).

  The tape cassette which concerns on this aspect is mounted | worn with the cassette mounting part (8) of a tape printer (1). At this time, when the tape printer includes a plurality of first detection switches (210) and a plurality of second detection switches (310), the front indicator portion faces the plurality of first detection switches, and the bottom indicator. The portion faces a plurality of second detection switches. The plurality of first detection switches are switches that can advance and retract in a predetermined direction. The plurality of second detection switches are switches that can advance and retract in a direction different from the predetermined direction.

  The front indicator portion facing the plurality of first detection switches selectively presses the plurality of first detection switches according to the combination of the switch hole and the surface portion in the plurality of first indicator portions. The bottom surface index portion facing the plurality of second detection switches selectively presses the plurality of second detection switches according to the combination of the switch hole and the surface portion in the plurality of second index portions. Thereby, the tape cassette can make a tape printer detect the 1st element and 2nd element which are contained in the kind of tape.

  The front surface index portion and the bottom surface index portion are provided at positions separated from each other and different wall surfaces in the cassette case. That is, the position and range of the index portion indicating the type of tape are not limited to one wall surface. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of patterns of the tape type detected by the tape printer. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing a tape cassette that allows the tape printer to detect the type of tape can be improved.

  Further, the front index portion and the bottom index portion selectively press the plurality of first detection switches and the plurality of second detection switches from positions separated from each other and from different directions, respectively. Thereby, the tape printer can clearly distinguish different elements included in the type of tape. Accordingly, the tape cassette can cause the tape printer to detect the first element and the second element more accurately.

  The front indicator portion is provided on the front wall corresponding to the plurality of first detection switches protruding horizontally. The bottom index portion is provided on the bottom wall corresponding to the plurality of second detection switches protruding upward. When the bottom surface indicator portion selectively presses the plurality of second detection switches, the repulsive force of the second detection switch facing the surface portion is applied to the bottom wall. At this time, the rear end side of the cassette case may be lifted by the repulsive force of the plurality of second detection switches.

  Both the front index part and the bottom index part are provided at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the cassette case. That is, the repulsive force of the plurality of second detection switches is applied to the center position in the left-right direction on the rear end side of the cassette case. Even when the rear end side of the cassette case is lifted, the cassette case is not easily tilted in the left-right direction, so that the influence on the front end side of the cassette case is small. Therefore, even when the rear end side of the cassette case is lifted, a change in the positional relationship between the front index portion and the plurality of first detection switches can be suppressed. As a result, the tape cassette can suppress erroneous detection of the first element by the tape printer.

  The first element is preferably information that has a large influence on the printing operation of the tape printer (for example, information necessary for the tape printer to perform an appropriate printing operation). The second element is preferably information that has a small influence on the printing operation of the tape printer (for example, information unnecessary for the tape printer to perform an appropriate printing operation). Accordingly, the tape cassette can cause the tape printer to detect at least information that has a large influence on the printing operation among the types of tapes, and can suppress printing defects and running defects.

(3) In the conventional tape cassette, the movement of the tape stored in the cassette case in the width direction is restricted by the upper wall of the upper case and the bottom wall of the lower case. However, when press-fitting of the upper case with respect to the lower case is insufficient, a gap may be generated between the upper case and the lower case. When there is a dimensional error in each of the upper case and the lower case, the dimensional error of the entire cassette case may be increased by joining the upper case and the lower case.

  In such a case, the distance between the top wall and the bottom wall becomes larger than the regular distance, and there is a possibility that the regulation in the width direction with respect to the tape becomes insufficient. Then, the tape conveyed in the cassette case meanders in the width direction, and there is a possibility that the vertical print center position by the print head and the tape width direction center position shift. As a result, the print position of the print head with respect to the tape is shifted, and there is a possibility that a good print result cannot be obtained. As a countermeasure, in the tape cassette manufacturing process, the dimensional accuracy of the cassette case and the press-fit state between the lower case and the upper case are strictly controlled. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect is a tape cassette that can be attached to and detached from a tape printer (1) having a head holder (74) having a print head (10), and has an upper wall (305). A box-shaped cassette case (31) including a case (311) and a lower case (312) having a bottom wall (306) and a lower outer wall (304) which is an outer wall extending vertically upward from an edge of the bottom wall A tape (55, 57, 58, 59) stored in the cassette case, and a head insertion portion (39) into which the head holder is inserted, which is a space penetrating the cassette case in the vertical direction. A second wall that extends vertically upward from the bottom wall provided between the first wall portion (35B), which is a part of the lower outer wall, and the first wall portion and the head insertion portion. With wall (33) The arm portion (34) for guiding the tape to the discharge port (341) along the transport path between the first wall portion and the second wall portion, and the first portion regardless of the type of the tape. A locking hole (820) that is always provided in the wall portion and a width direction restricting portion (381B, 383) that is provided in the second wall portion and restricts movement of the tape in the width direction.

  The tape cassette which concerns on this aspect is provided with the arm part which guides a tape between the 1st wall part and 2nd wall part which are contained in a lower case. The second wall portion is provided with a width direction restricting portion that restricts movement of the tape in the width direction. Thereby, irrespective of the press-fit state of the upper case and the lower case, the dimensional accuracy of the width direction restricting portion is guaranteed, and the movement of the tape in the width direction can be accurately regulated. As a result, the print center position in the vertical direction by the print head and the center position in the width direction of the tape coincide with each other with high accuracy, so that the print quality can be improved. Furthermore, the burden of managing the dimensional accuracy and press-fitting state of the operator can be reduced.

  Further, the first wall portion is always provided with a locking hole regardless of the type of tape. When the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion (8) of the tape printer and the tape printer is provided with the locking portion (225), the locking hole is locked by the locking portion. Thereby, the position of the first wall portion is fixed, and consequently the position of the arm portion is fixed. Therefore, for example, the vibration of the arm part during the printing operation is suppressed, and the tape transport in the arm part can be stabilized.

  Each of the first wall portion and the second wall portion is a wall portion included in the lower case, and is a part of the wall portion constituting the arm portion. Therefore, when the position of the arm portion is fixed as described above, the width direction restricting portion is positioned at an appropriate height position regardless of the press-fit state of the upper case and the lower case. As a result, the movement of the tape guided in the arm portion in the width direction is more reliably regulated, and the displacement of the print position of the print head with respect to the tape can be reliably suppressed.

(4) In the conventional tape cassette, a cassette detector is provided on the lower surface of the tape cassette in correspondence with the tape printer provided with a plurality of detection switches protruding upward. For example, when a tape cassette is manufactured, there is a possibility that an operator may erroneously store a tape that does not correspond to the type of tape indicated by the cassette detection unit in the cassette case.

  If the type of tape stored in the cassette case does not correspond to the cassette detection unit, the tape printer erroneously detects the type of tape indicated by the cassette detection unit. If the type of tape is erroneously detected by the tape printer, there is a risk of malfunction of the tape printer or defective printing. As a countermeasure, the tape cassette manufacturing process includes an inspection process for checking the type of tape indicated by the cassette detection unit and the type of stored tape for each manufactured tape cassette. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect is a tape cassette that can be attached to and detached from a tape printer (1) having a head holder (74) having a print head (10), and has an upper wall (305). A box-shaped cassette case (31) including a case (311) and a lower case (312) having a bottom wall (306) and a lower outer wall (304) which is an outer wall extending vertically upward from an edge of the bottom wall A tape (55, 57, 58, 59) stored in the cassette case, and a head insertion portion (39) into which the head holder is inserted, which is a space penetrating the cassette case in the vertical direction. A second wall that extends vertically upward from the bottom wall provided between the first wall portion (35B), which is a part of the lower outer wall, and the first wall portion and the head insertion portion. With wall (33) An arm portion (34) for guiding the tape between the first wall portion and the second wall portion along a transport path to a discharge port (341); and the tape provided on the first wall portion, A front index portion (800) indicating the type of the tape and a width direction restriction portion (381B, 383) provided on the second wall portion for restricting movement of the tape in the width direction, , Including a plurality of indicator portions (800A to 800E) arranged in a pattern according to the type of the tape, each of the plurality of indicator portions is either a switch hole (801) or a surface portion (802), The width direction restricting portion is provided at a position adjacent to the front index portion and visible from the front of the first wall portion.

  The tape cassette which concerns on this aspect is provided with the arm part which guides a tape between a 1st wall part and a 2nd wall part. The first wall portion is provided with a front indicator portion indicating the type of tape. The second wall portion is provided with a width direction restricting portion that restricts movement of the tape in the width direction. The width direction restricting portion and the front index portion are provided adjacent to each other and are visible from the front of the first wall portion. A person can visually identify the front index portion and specify the type of tape based on whether each of the plurality of index portions is a switch hole or a surface portion. In other words, the person who can regulate the tape regulated by the width direction regulating part and the type of the tape indicated by the front index part can be simultaneously seen from one direction.

  For example, in a tape cassette manufacturing process, an operator stores a tape in a lower case and inserts a part of the tape into an arm portion. The operator attaches a part of the tape inserted into the arm portion to a position where it is properly restricted by the width direction restricting portion. Then, the operator can collate whether the tape regulated by the width direction regulation part corresponds to the type of tape indicated by the front index part by visually observing the first wall part from the front. Therefore, the operator can easily find out that the wrong type of tape is stored in the tape cassette. As a result, the manufacturing mistake of a tape cassette can be suppressed and the burden which an operator performs an inspection process can be reduced.

  Each of the first wall portion and the second wall portion is a wall portion included in the lower case, and is a part of the wall portion constituting the arm portion. Thereby, irrespective of the press-fit state of the upper case and the lower case, the dimensional accuracy of the width direction restricting portion is guaranteed, and the movement of the tape in the width direction can be accurately regulated. As a result, the print center position in the vertical direction by the print head and the center position in the width direction of the tape coincide with each other with high accuracy, so that the print quality can be improved.

  Further, when the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion (8) of the tape printer and the tape printer is provided with a plurality of detection switches (210), the front indicator portion faces the plurality of detection switches. The plurality of detection switches are switches that can advance and retract in a predetermined direction. The front indicator portion facing the plurality of detection switches selectively presses the plurality of detection switches according to the combination of the switch hole and the surface portion in the plurality of indicator portions. Thereby, the tape cassette can also make the tape printer detect the type of tape.

(5) Conventionally, for example, when the user does not correctly mount the tape cassette or when the tape printer is not correctly operated, the tape cassette may be mounted on the cassette mounting portion in an inclined state from an appropriate posture. there were. If the printing operation is performed in a state where the tape cassette is inclined in the cassette mounting portion, there is a possibility that a running failure of the tape or a printing failure of the print head may occur in the tape printing apparatus. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect is a tape cassette that can be attached to and detached from a tape printer (1) having a head holder (74) having a print head (10), and is a bottom that forms a bottom surface (302). The wall (306), the upper wall (305) that forms the upper surface (301), and the side walls (303, 304) that form the side surfaces define the outer shape and include a plurality of corners (321 to 324). A box-shaped cassette case (31), at least one tape (55, 57, 58, 59) stored in a tape storage area (400, 410) defined in the outer shape, and extending from the bottom wall A pair of cavities (47, 64) provided at both ends of a diagonal line connecting one corner (322) and the other corner (324) between the tape storage area and the outer shape. And the cassette A space penetrating the case in the vertical direction, a head insertion portion (39) into which the head holder is inserted, and a recess recessed upward from the bottom surface and connected to the end of the head insertion portion Support receiving portions (391, 392).

  When the tape cassette according to this aspect is attached to and detached from the cassette mounting portion (8) of the tape printer, and the tape printer has a pair of guide shafts (100, 120), a pair of guide shafts in the pair of cavities Is inserted. In this case, when the user attaches / detaches the tape cassette to / from the cassette mounting portion along the pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities, the tape cassette is prevented from being inclined from an appropriate posture. As a result, it is possible to suppress the running failure of the tape and the printing failure of the print head due to the tape cassette being inclined in the cassette mounting portion.

  Further, a support receiving portion is provided that is connected to the end portion of the head insertion portion and is a recess recessed upward from the bottom surface. When the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion and the tape printer includes the support portions (741, 742), the support receiving portion is supported from below by the support portion. In this case, the support receiving portion is supported by the support portion at a position close to the print head that performs printing on the tape. Therefore, the vertical position of the tape cassette can be accurately positioned when the tape cassette is mounted. As a result, the print center position in the vertical direction by the print head and the center position in the width direction of the tape coincide with each other with high accuracy, so that the print quality can be improved.

  The tape cassette is guided in the attaching / detaching direction by the pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities, and movement in a direction different from the attaching / detaching direction is restricted. Therefore, it is easy to position the tape cassette with respect to the cassette mounting portion. Thereby, when the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion, the head holder is prevented from coming into contact with the outer edge of the head insertion portion. The user can smoothly insert the head holder into the head insertion portion. Further, the user can accurately position the support receiving portion on the support portion. As a result, since the support receiving portion is reliably supported by the support portion, the print quality can be further improved.

(6) Conventionally, for example, when the user does not correctly mount the tape cassette or when the tape printer is not correctly operated, the tape cassette may be mounted on the cassette mounting portion in an inclined state from an appropriate posture. there were. When the tape cassette is tilted in the cassette mounting portion, the cassette detection portion may not accurately face a plurality of detection switches. In this case, the cassette detection unit may not press the detection switch that is scheduled to be pressed, or may press the detection switch that is not scheduled to be pressed.

  When a plurality of detection switches are pressed in an incorrect pattern, the tape printer detects a tape type different from the tape type stored in the tape cassette mounted in the cassette mounting portion. As described above, when the wrong type of tape is detected by the tape printer, there is a possibility that malfunction of the tape printer or defective printing may occur. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect has a box shape in which a bottom wall (306), an upper wall (305), and side walls (303, 304) define an outer shape and includes a plurality of corners (321 to 324). A cassette case (31), at least one tape (55, 57, 58, 59) stored in a tape storage area (400, 410) defined in the outer shape, and extending from the bottom wall; A pair of cavities (47, 64) provided at both ends of a diagonal line connecting the one corner (322) and the other corner (324) between the tape storage area and the outer shape; A plurality of indicator portions (900A to 900E) arranged on the bottom wall and arranged in a pattern corresponding to the type of the tape. Including the plurality Each indicator unit is either switch hole (901) and face (902).

  When the tape cassette according to this aspect is attached to and detached from the cassette mounting portion (8) of the tape printer (1) and the tape printer includes a pair of guide shafts (100, 120), a pair of cavities The guide shaft is inserted. In this case, when the user attaches / detaches the tape cassette to / from the cassette mounting portion along the pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities, the tape cassette is prevented from being inclined from an appropriate posture.

  When the tape cassette is mounted on a cassette mounting portion of a tape printer provided with a plurality of detection switches (310), the bottom surface indicator portion accurately faces the plurality of detection switches. The plurality of detection switches are switches that can advance and retract in a predetermined direction. The bottom surface index portion facing the plurality of detection switches selectively presses the plurality of detection switches according to the combination of the switch hole and the surface portion in the plurality of index portions. That is, each of the plurality of detection switches is in a pressed or non-pressed state depending on the type of tape. Thus, the tape cassette can cause the tape printer to accurately detect the type of tape. Further, it is possible to suppress a tape running failure or a printing head printing failure caused by the tape cassette being inclined in the cassette mounting portion.

  Furthermore, the bottom surface index portion is provided on the bottom wall of the cassette case in correspondence with the plurality of detection switches protruding upward. The tape cassette is guided in the attaching / detaching direction along a pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities. The direction in which the tape cassette is attached / detached is parallel to the advance / retreat direction of the plurality of detection switches. When the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion, the plurality of detection switches facing the surface portion are pressed in the direction opposite to the protruding direction.

  Therefore, it is suppressed that a load is applied to the detection switch pressed by the surface portion in a direction different from the forward / backward direction. As a result, bending or breakage of the detection switch is suppressed. Furthermore, since the detection switch is pressed accurately, the tape type detection accuracy can be improved.

(7) In the conventional tape cassette, a positioning pin hole is provided on the bottom surface of the cassette case. When the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion, positioning pins provided on the cassette mounting portion are inserted into the pin holes of the tape cassette. Thus, the vertical positioning of the tape cassette mounted on the cassette mounting portion has been performed.

  However, the pin holes of the tape cassette are provided at two locations near the outer periphery of the bottom surface of the cassette case. The tape printer has positioning pins at two locations corresponding to the pin holes. That is, the positioning position of the tape cassette is set at a position away from the print head.

  Therefore, if the pin hole and positioning pin are not manufactured with accurate dimensions, when the tape cassette is positioned by inserting the positioning pin into the pin hole, the vertical print center position by the print head and the tape There was a risk of shifting from the center position in the width direction. As a result, the print position of the print head with respect to the tape is shifted, and there is a possibility that a good print result cannot be obtained. As a countermeasure, in the tape cassette manufacturing process, the dimensions of the pin hole and the positioning pin are managed with high accuracy. Therefore, the above technical features may be provided as in a tape cassette according to the following aspect.

  The tape cassette (30) according to this aspect is a tape cassette that can be attached to and detached from a tape printer (1) having a head holder (74) having a print head (10), and has an upper surface (301) and a bottom surface (302). ), A front surface (35), and a pair of side surfaces (303, 304), an upper case (311) having an upper wall (305) forming the upper surface, and a bottom wall (306) forming the bottom surface and A cassette case (31) including a lower case (312) having a lower outer wall (304) which is an outer wall extending vertically upward from an edge of the bottom surface, and a tape rotatably accommodated in the cassette case A wound tape roll (55, 57, 58, 59) and a space penetrating the cassette case in the vertical direction when the tape cassette is mounted on the tape printer. A head insertion portion (39) into which the head holder is inserted, a first wall portion (35B) which is a part of the lower outer wall, and a space between the first wall portion and the head insertion portion. And a second wall portion (33) that is a wall extending vertically upward from the bottom wall, and the tape is discharged along the transport path between the first wall portion and the second wall portion. An arm portion (34) for guiding to (341), a width direction restriction portion (381B, 383) provided on the second wall portion for restricting movement of the tape in the width direction, and the second wall portion. A printing surface side regulating member (389) provided to regulate movement of the tape to the printing surface side, bend the conveyance path to the head insertion portion side, and guide discharge to the outside of the arm portion; and the width direction A lower joint (330) provided in the upper part of the restricting part, and provided in the upper case; When the upper case and the lower case are assembled, they are connected to the upper joint portion (331) to be joined to the lower joint portion and the end portion located on the upstream side in the tape transport direction in the head insertion portion. And a support receiving portion (391, 392) facing the head insertion portion in a direction parallel to the front surface.

  The tape cassette according to this aspect is provided with a support receiving portion that is a recess recessed upward from the bottom surface, connected to the end of the head insertion portion. When the tape cassette is mounted on the cassette mounting portion (8) of the tape printer and the tape printer is provided with the support portions (741, 742), the support receiving portion is supported from below by the support portion. In this case, the support receiving portion is supported by the support portion at a position close to the print head that performs printing on the tape. Therefore, the vertical position of the tape cassette can be accurately positioned when the tape cassette is mounted. As a result, the print center position in the vertical direction by the print head and the center position in the width direction of the tape coincide with each other with high accuracy, so that the print quality can be improved. Furthermore, the burden of managing the dimensional accuracy of the operator can be reduced.

  Further, the lower case includes a guide portion that guides the tape drawn from the tape roll between the first wall portion and the second wall portion. The second wall portion includes a width direction regulating member that regulates movement of the tape in the width direction and a printing surface side regulating member that regulates movement of the tape to the printing surface side. That is, a member that restricts movement of the tape in the width direction and the print surface side is provided in the arm portion of the lower case. Thereby, irrespective of the press-fit state of the upper case and the lower case, the dimensional accuracy of the width direction restricting portion and the print surface side restricting member is guaranteed, and the movement of the tape in the width direction and the print surface side can be appropriately restricted. As a result, the print center position in the vertical direction by the print head and the center position in the width direction of the tape coincide with each other more accurately, so that the print quality can be further improved.

  On the upper part of the width-direction regulating member, a lower joint part that joins an upper joint part provided in the upper case is provided. As a result, the upper case and the lower case are fixed at positions where movement of the tape in the width direction and the print surface side is restricted, and the positions of the width direction restricting portion and the print surface side restricting member are also fixed. For this reason, it is possible to more reliably regulate the movement of the tape transported in the arm portion in the width direction and the print surface side.

  The support receiving portion, the width direction regulating member, and the printing surface side regulating member are all provided in the lower case. Accordingly, the positional relationship among the support receiving portion, the width direction regulating member, and the printing surface side regulating member is constant regardless of the press-fitted state between the upper case and the lower case. Accordingly, as the support receiving portion is supported by the support portion at an appropriate height position, the width direction regulating member and the print surface side regulating member are also held at the appropriate height position. Therefore, the height position of the tape conveyed in the arm portion more accurately matches the vertical print center position by the print head, so that the print quality can be further improved.

(8) In the tape cassette according to any one of the above aspects (1), (5), and (6), the at least one tape is wound so as to have a hole in the center and connects the pair of cavities. A third cavity including a tape (55, 57, 58) located in one of two regions into which the cassette case is divided with reference to a line, extending from the bottom wall and facing the hole of the tape (65) may be provided.

  When the tape cassette according to this aspect is attached to and detached from the cassette mounting portion, and the tape printer includes the third guide shaft (110), the third guide shaft is inserted into the third cavity. In this case, the user can attach / detach the tape cassette to / from the cassette mounting portion along the pair of guide shafts inserted into the pair of cavities and the third guide shaft inserted into the third cavities. As a result, it can suppress reliably that a tape cassette inclines from a proper attitude | position.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Tape printer 10 Thermal head 30 Tape cassette 31 Cassette case 33 Separation wall 34 Arm part 35 Arm front wall 35B Lower arm front wall 39 Head insertion part 47 Guide hole 55 Thermal paper tape 57 Printing tape 58 Double-sided adhesive tape 59 Film tape 64 Roller Support hole 65 First tape support hole 74 Head holder 301 Upper surface 302 Bottom surface 303 Upper peripheral wall 304 Lower peripheral wall 305 Upper plate 306 Bottom plate 311 Upper case 312 Lower case 321 First corner 322 Second corner 323 Third corner 324 First Quadrangle part 330 Upper end part 331 Fixing groove 341 Discharge port 381B First tape lower restriction part 383 Separation wall restriction part 389 First printing surface side restriction part 391 First receiving part 392 Second receiving part 400 First tape area 410 Second Tape area 800 Arm index part 800A Index part 800B Target portion 800C indicator portion 800D indicator portion 800E indicator portion 801 the non-pressing portion 802 pressing portion 820 locking hole 900 rearward indicator portion 900A indicator portion 900B indicator portion 900C indicator portion 900D indicator portion 900E indicator portion 901 the non-pressing portion 902 pressing portion

Claims (4)

A cassette case comprising an upper case having an upper surface, a bottom surface, a front surface, and a pair of side surfaces, and having an upper plate forming the upper surface; and a lower case having a bottom plate forming the bottom surface ;
A tape, which is a printing medium, stored in the cassette case ;
Provided at the arm front wall that is a part of the front surface, the arm back wall that is a wall portion spaced rearward from the arm front wall, and the downstream end of the tape transport direction that is the direction in which the tape is transported An arm portion for guiding the tape toward the discharge port along a path extending substantially parallel to the arm front wall;
It has a head peripheral wall behind the arm portion and extending substantially parallel to the arm back wall, and a head side wall connecting the arm back wall and the head peripheral wall, and penetrates the cassette case in the vertical direction. An opening,
A lower recess recessed in a direction along the arm front wall from the head side wall;
A tape cassette provided on the front wall of the arm and provided with a front indicator portion indicating the type of the tape ,
The lower concave portion is recessed upward from a part of the bottom surface,
The front indicator part, prior SL includes a plurality of indicator portions arranged in a pattern corresponding to the type of tape,
Each of the plurality of indicator portions detects the detection with respect to a plurality of detection switches that can move forward and backward in a predetermined direction provided in the tape printer when the tape cassette is attached to a cassette attachment portion of the tape printer. A tape cassette that is one of a non-pressing portion that is a hole portion that does not press a switch and a pressing portion that is a surface portion that presses the detection switch. The tape cassette includes an ink ribbon and a ribbon take-up spool that takes up the ink ribbon,
2. The tape cassette according to claim 1, wherein the lower concave portion extends to an upstream side in the tape transport direction with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface and passing through a rotation center of the ribbon take-up spool. An upper recess that is recessed in the direction along the arm front wall from the head side wall;
The tape cassette according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the upper recess is recessed downward from a part of the upper surface. The tape cassette according to claim 3, wherein at least a part of the lower recess and the upper recess face each other in the vertical direction.

Images